JP2023101722A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: For a slot machine 10, an AT mode is set in which a push order notification for notifying a player of an operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 may be generated. In the AT mode, when 18 games are set as one set and a continuation condition is satisfied, the set is updated and the next set is started. On an auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, a pseudo-set performance is executed in which 10 games are set as one set. When a third specific performance is generated in the pseudo-set performance, the pseudo-set performance of the next set is started, regardless of the number of games remaining in the set in the pseudo-set performance. It is set so that the larger the number of games is until the third specific performance in the pseudo-set performance is generated, the easier it is to satisfy the continuation condition of the AT mode set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a state where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reels is started, and rotation of the reels is stopped when a stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a game progress means for progressing a game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by a player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
privilege granting means for awarding a privilege to a player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
As the advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of games tends to be larger than the first advantageous state are set,
In the advantageous state, a special number game is set as one unit notification state, and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. On the other hand, if the special number game is executed without the specific notification being performed, after the end of the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started.
When the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of executed games executed in the unit notification state is set so as to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows a continuation determination process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a selection rate of AT mode continuation rate; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of confrontation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of battle production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific effect table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the occurrence of a specific effect and the presence or absence of continuation of AT mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuation rate of AT mode and the occurrence timing of the specific effect. 10 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. 14 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in Modified Example 3. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing suggestion effect setting processing in Modification 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a suggestion effect|presentation table. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by the auxiliary display section in modification 5; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd specific production|presentation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows standby production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd specific production|presentation table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation in AT mode in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd specific production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd specific production|presentation table. FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between AT mode sets and pseudo sets; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in modification 1; It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd specific effect table at the time of an update. 13 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in modification 2; It is a figure which shows an example of an ending game number table. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a third specific effect table in modification 3; FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the AT mode continuation rate and the pseudo set; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation in AT mode in 3rd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows the 4th specific production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot effect game number setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing adjustment processing; It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot effect game number table and an adjustment game number table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation of AT mode last set.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, FIG. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a and 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. When the shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported by the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis line connecting the shafts 13a and 13b and extending in the vertical direction. Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently of each other, by driving the stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying, for example, a 500-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 can confirm and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and can perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main controller 101 to recognize the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (for example, 2nd on the left reel 32L), a “cherry” symbol (eg, 8th on the left reel 32L), a “BAR” symbol (eg, 9th on the left reel 32L), and a “white 7” symbol. There are 10 types of symbols (for example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), ``young man'' symbols (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), ``red shell'' symbols (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), and ``white shells'' symbols (for example, 19th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, the combination of these three symbols includes, for example, a combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a lower row of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols to be stopped on the lower line L3 connecting the symbols. Also, there is a combination of symbols stopping on a right-down line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the combination of each symbol stopping on the right-rising line L5 connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting of medals and a line that is not activated are set, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, ie, the activated line, as winning, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals as game media or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an active line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started by betting three medals or by betting two medals. When the game is started by betting three or two medals, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, hereinafter, a game started with three medals betted is also called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals betted is called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal betted is also called a 1-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor win is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and can also understand that a minor winning combination different from the first minor winning combination has been established due to the difference in the lines on which the 'Bell' patterns are aligned.

When the ``bell'' pattern on the left reel 32L, the ``replay'' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the ``watermelon'' pattern or the ``red clam'' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third minor win is won. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and can also understand that the minor winning combination different from the first minor winning combination or the second minor winning combination has been established due to the difference in the lines on which the 'bell' patterns are aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor win is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and can also understand that a minor winning combination different from the above-described first to third minor winning combinations has been established due to the difference in the lines on which the 'bell' patterns are aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and can also understand that a minor winning combination different from the first to fourth minor winning combinations has been established due to the difference in the lines on which the 'bell' patterns are aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning prize are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbols are stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R (stops in a small mountain shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and can also understand that a small winning combination different from the first to fifth minor winning combinations has been established from the difference in the stop position of the ``bell'' pattern.

When the ``Bell'' pattern on the left reel 32L, the ``White 7'' pattern, ``Cherry'' pattern, the ``red clam'' pattern or the ``Seinen'' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the ``White 7'' pattern, the ``White Shell'' pattern or the ``Seinen'' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the seventh minor win is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been won.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the minor winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and can also understand that the minor winning combination different from the seventh minor winning combination has been established due to the difference in the lines on which the 'watermelon' patterns are aligned.

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins, in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L with "Replay", "Red 7", "BAR", "Ark", "White shell", "Youth" or "Bell" symbols, and the middle reel 32M with "White 7", "Cherry", "Ark", "Youth", "Red 7", "Watermelon", "Replay", and "BAR". ', 'Bell', or 'white shell' pattern and 'red 7', 'white 7', 'white shell', 'youth', 'watermelon', 'red shell', 'BAR', or 'replay' patterns on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML to win a prize. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combinations of symbols corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor winning prizes are all set so that the ``bell'' symbols do not stop together on the straight line (L1 to L5), and are set so that it is easy to understand that the minor winning prize corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins won, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the game result. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals may also be referred to as the paid out medal rate.

Winnings that give a replay benefit (game value) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals include first to twelfth replay winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

In the first replay, winning is established when a 'replay' pattern on the left reel 32L, a 'watermelon' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and a 'red 7' pattern, a 'white 7' pattern, a 'white shell' pattern or a 'young man' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, winning is established when the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``cherry'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(e), the middle line L2 is stopped with all the "WHITE 7" symbols.

In the third replay, winning is established when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. When the symbols corresponding to the third replay winning prize are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(f), the ``white 7'' symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the ``red 7'' symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

In the sixth replay, winning is established when a ``bell'' pattern on the left reel 32L, a ``watermelon'' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and a ``red 7'' pattern, a ``white 7'' pattern, a ``BAR'' pattern, a ``cherry'' pattern, a ``white shell'' pattern or a ``youth'' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called upper watermelon tenpai out stop mode. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M).

In the seventh replay, winning is established when the ``bell'' pattern on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' pattern, the ``cherry'' pattern, the ``red clam'' pattern or the ``youth'' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the ``watermelon'' or ``red clam'' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai" stopping mode. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the lower stage of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the right reel 32R).

In the eighth replay, winning is established when the ``watermelon'' pattern on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' pattern, the ``cherry'' pattern, the ``red clam'' pattern or the ``youth'' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the ``replay'' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, winning is established when a ``replay'' pattern on the left reel 32L, a ``watermelon'' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and a ``watermelon'' pattern or a ``red clam'' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbol corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbol does not stop on the middle stage of the right reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the right reel 32R).

In the tenth replay, a prize is won when the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``WHITE 7'' symbol, ``BAR'' symbol, ``Cherry'' symbol, ``red clam'' symbol or ``Youth'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``RED 7'' symbol, ``WHITE 7'' symbol, ``BAR'' symbol, ``Cherry'' symbol, ``white shell'' symbol or ``Youth'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. established. In the twelfth replay, winning is established when the 'BAR' pattern on the left reel 32L, the 'BAR' pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the 'bell', 'watermelon' or 'red clam' pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th regame win or 12th regame win stops on the activated line ML, the "Cherry" symbol stops at the bottom of the left reel 32L. When the tenth re-game or the 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the 'cherry' symbol on the right reel 32R, the 'cherry' symbol stops at the upper stage in the case of the 10th re-game winning, and the 'cherry' symbol stops in the middle or the lower stage in the case of the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB wins. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the ``BAR'' symbols are stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG.

When the "red clam" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB wins. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the ``White 7'' symbols are stopped together on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the detection signals are switched from LOW signals to HI signals. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops rotating, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops rotating, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Stop lamps 42b to 44b are built in the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b-44b is partially transmitted through the operating surfaces of the stop switches 42-44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b-44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42-44. When the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enabled, the stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to turn on, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to be turned off.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the selector 46 is filled with the medals inserted into the medal insertion port 45, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are returned from the medal discharge port 49.例文帳に追加

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of virtual medals credited as game media at once out of a prescribed number of games is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to 3 and the specified number is set to 3, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual tokens are inserted on the condition that there are credits, and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set to 2 and the specified number is set to 2, 2 virtual tokens are inserted on the condition that there are credits, and the specified number is set to 3 or 2, and the specified number is set. is set as 3, three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, and if the specified number is set as 3 or 2, and the specified number is set as 2, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 2 virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 together with the medal insertion port 45 constitute input means for inputting game media. Also, while the medal slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit input switch 56 has a larger operation surface to be operated by the player than the second credit input switch 57, and the first credit input switch 56 is superior to the second credit input switch 57 in operability. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a state in which the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display part 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display part 61 for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state is completed, and a payout number display part 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a pressing order indicator for informing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an interval indicator for showing an advantageous interval which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by notifying the operation order so as to change the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

Above the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 which lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 which emits various sound effects as the game progresses and notifies the player of the game state, and an auxiliary display part 65 which gives various information to the player. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and is called the auxiliary display section 65 in the present embodiment because the game with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display section. An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine in the main controller 101 so that it can be seen from the front of the game machine when the front door 12 is open and cannot be seen from the front of the game machine when the front door 12 is closed. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in a closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be confirmed unless the key cylinder 21 is unlocked by a predetermined key operation to open the front door 12. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a-44a that individually detect the operation of the stop switches 42-44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and the medals dispensed from the hopper device 51 are detected. a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56; a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57; a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59; a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72; Signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and a power failure signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, there are reel units 31 (more specifically, stepping motors for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), and the like. are connected via the input/output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 for securing a work area for temporarily storing various data for executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various processing circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit necessary for the slot machine 10, and various counters such as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 is provided with a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when performing stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a set value information storage area 106c for storing set values, and a backup area.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown (including power shutdown by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 incorporates a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 may directly control all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal. Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer update process is performed to subtract/add the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing for automatically throwing in three virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, processing for automatically throwing in two virtual medals is performed.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. When none of the replay winning prizes is established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the reading result of the sensor performed in the sensor monitoring processing (step S107) of the timer interrupt processing is performed, and when an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is brought into an error state and an abnormality occurrence processing is performed for announcing the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 is operated, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated, medal return processing for paying out the same number of medals as credited virtual medals is performed.

After completion of the medal return processing or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, it is determined whether medal insertion or operation of the credit insertion switches 56, 57 is performed from the previous start waiting processing to the current start waiting processing, and if either is performed, the medal insertion processing for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "3", and in a non-bonus state, the affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2" or "3". In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that receives the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, it means that a start command for starting the game has been generated because the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, since the prescribed numbers of bets are set to ``3'' and ``2'' as described above, the lottery tables for the normal game state are the lottery table for the 3-bet game and the lottery table for the 2-bet game.

That is, in step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags is set, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (Fig. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is the 2-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (Fig. 21) for the 2-bet game is selected. In addition, in the slot machine 10, winning probabilities of six stages from ``setting 1'' to ``setting 6'' are prepared in advance, and by inserting a setting key into a setting key insertion hole and performing an ON operation and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the RAM 106 is initialized when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated as a predetermined operation. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, the set value is updated in the order of 'setting 1'→'setting 2'→'setting 3'→'setting 4'→'setting 5'→'setting 6'→'setting 1'. Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is regarded as a setting value fixing operation, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is finished. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1, which is the current index value IV, is added to this random value to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, the second BB winning flag is set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is neither a winning flag (first BB winning flag) indicating winning in the first BB nor a winning flag (second BB winning flag) indicating winning in the second BB, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set if a winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is won, and the corresponding winning flag is not set if the winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is not won.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in the state that the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set.

A lottery table may be prepared separately in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and lottery processing may be performed in the separately prepared lottery table in the state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the winning judgment is made based on the judgment value DV.

By the way, when judging whether a winning combination is successful using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when a 3-bet game is played in a normal game state, the probability of winning normal reply A (probability of winning when IV=1) is about 1/27.3 at setting 1, about 1/27.5 at setting 3, and about 1/28.3 at setting 6. The higher the set value, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both about 1/26.2 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, the probability of winning the chance B (probability of winning when IV=5) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 1/16400 regardless of the set value. It is set so that the eye A is more likely to be elected. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 1/93.6 with setting 6, and is set so that the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV=9) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the forward-pressing bell 1, forward-pressing bell 2, pinch-push bell 1, pinch-push bell 2, middle-order bell 1, middle-order push bell 2, middle-reverse push bell 1, middle-reverse push bell 2, reverse-push bell 1, reverse-push bell 2, reverse-push bell 1, reverse-push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push-order bell) probability (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is about 1/18.4 for each, regardless of the set value. In summary, the probability of winning the lottery is about 1/1.53. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV=25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the setting value, and is set higher than the winning probability of other winnings (replay or small winnings, IV=1-24). In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, when judging whether a winning combination is correct using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when a 2-bet game is played in a normal game state, the probability of winning normal response A, normal response B, normal response C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same as the probability of playing the 3-bet game. The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and is set to make winning easier than when playing a 3-bet game. The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, and is set to make winning less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to be won, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is about 1/4.95 regardless of the set value. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, when the pressing order bell 1 is won (won at IV=11) and the 1st minor role winning flag, 9th minor role winning flag, 10th minor role winning flag and 13th minor role winning flag are set, stop pattern information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor role winnings can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Further, when watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the seventh minor winning combination winning flag and the eighth minor winning winning flag are set, stop pattern information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the seventh minor winning winning combination and the eighth minor winning winning combination can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the 1BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, stop pattern information for establishing the 1BB prize is not set in the stop information setting process of step S312 (stop pattern information for avoiding the 1BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, stop pattern information for establishing the second BB prize is not set in the stop information setting process of step S312 (stop pattern information for avoiding the second BB prize is set).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. The order of priority is set so that the winning of the minor winning combination is preferentially established when winning the minor winning combination and the bonus, and the winning of the bonus winning is established when the winning of the minor winning combination cannot be established. When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in a situation in which the 1BB is won (the 1BB win flag is set and the 1BB win is carried over), the watermelon wins, and when stop pattern information corresponding to the 1BB win, the 7th minor win and the 8th minor win win is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor win and the 8th minor win win are established prior to the 1BB win. In addition, in the case where the 2BB is elected (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB election has been carried over), the second BB is selected, and the stoppage information corresponding to the 2nd BB winning, the first re -play, the second re -play, the third re -play, and the fourth re -play is set, Set a priority so that each re -play technique prize is prioritized over the BB prize.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing effects using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result handling process performed in step S310, and the like. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the reel started to rotate in the previous game, and if it has not passed, it waits until the wait time passes. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side lights up the stop lamps 42b to 44b incorporated in the respective stop switches 42 to 44, thereby notifying the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process advances to step S404 to determine whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also controls the stop lamps 42b to 44b corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time to turn off.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the present slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the following manners: when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is; 5 patterns of stop mode are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. At step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a winning is made when IV=11 to 22, that is, when a winning is made in the pressing order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), stop information second setting processing is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning prize, the 18th minor winning prize, or the 21st minor winning prize is established, and the stop information is set so that the 3rd minor winning prize is established when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. set. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Therefore, when the patterns of the same kind are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 patterns or less, the winning pattern can be stopped on the effective line when the winning pattern becomes the winning pattern regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is stopped on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "Bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "Ark shell" symbol (2-frame bet) which is the 18th minor winning symbol and the 5th "Replay" symbol (3-frame belly) which is the 21st minor winning symbol can be stopped in the middle stage, but the fourth "Ark shell" symbol with the smallest number of slide pieces stops at the middle stage. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed as described above. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor combination pattern, ie, the "white shell" pattern or the "young man" pattern can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the upper stage can be stopped, the winning of the 18th minor combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the upper stage cannot be stopped, so-called failure occurs.

Here, the case where the "red clam" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that there is a possibility of winning the 18th minor winning combination by winning the bell 1 in the middle order as described above, and there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the bell 2 in the middle order. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. Particularly, in the right reel 32R, the 18th minor role symbol and the 20th minor role symbol are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing that the 18th minor role symbol can be stopped on the valid line, the 20th minor role symbol cannot be stopped on the valid line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing that the 20th minor role symbol can be stopped on the valid line, the 18th minor role symbol cannot be stopped on the valid line. Therefore, on the premise that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, even if the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped and there is a possibility of winning the 18th minor role and the 20th minor role winning, it is not possible to win the prize.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As described above, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, in the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the second minor winning prize, the third minor winning prize, the fourth minor winning prize, the fifth minor winning prize, or the sixth minor winning winning prize are established. Even the small role winning was not established and it was dropped. Incidentally, when the common bell is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the 1st minor winning combination, the 2nd minor winning combination, the 3rd minor winning combination, the 4th minor winning combination, the 5th minor winning combination, or the 6th minor winning combination are established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stop symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a prize is established on the active line. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal pay-out processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game mode to the re-game mode, and the medal pay-out processing is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Concretely, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after the addition is displayed on the credit display part 60.例文帳に追加When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit or when the count value reaches the upper limit during addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper device 51 to the medal receiving tray 50 through the medal discharge port 49.例文帳に追加In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current game state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter of the number of remaining payouts to be described later and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the number of remaining payouts display section 61 is performed.

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of coins for the game, it is allowed to play a two-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 in a situation where two or three coins are set as the prescribed number for the game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that receives the first BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the start of the first BB state is performed. Further, the display control device 81 receives the first BB start command, so that it can be grasped that the next game is in the first BB state, and the speaker 64, the auxiliary display part 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB state performance is performed from the next game.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

The default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. A display control device 81 receiving the second BB start command controls a speaker 64, an auxiliary display part 65 and the like so as to perform the second BB start performance corresponding to the start of the second BB state, and controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display part 65 and the like so as to perform the performance for the second BB state from the next game. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In the present embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables may be provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities of each combination may be different. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a normal reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a double role (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although an increase in medals cannot be expected, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be shifted to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is caused by winning the 1st to 6th small wins in which 13 coins are paid out. Comparing the winning percentages of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19, whereas in the 1BB state the probability of winning is about 1/5.96. In the normal game state in the 2-bet game and in the 2nd BB state to which the 2-bet game can be shifted, the main increase in medals is a common bell. In the normal game state, the probability of winning is approximately 1/9.64, whereas in the 2BB state, the probability of winning is approximately 1/5.96.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. When winning is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that receives the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step S521, after setting the specified bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted, and the game is played as a 2-bet game. In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the setting is such that the game is easily played in the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are ended, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 coins by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 or the 2nd credit insertion switch 57, and it is necessary to insert 3 medals from the medal insertion port 45 in order to play a 3-bet game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is carried over is entered. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As already explained, in the present slot machine 10, in the internal state where the 1BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 1BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB winning is not established in the 2-bet game. Further, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in the 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won, but if the 1st BB is won and the game is switched to the 2-bet game, the 1st BB cannot be won. Also, when the second BB is won in the 2-bet game, the 2-BB winning can be established by continuing the 2-betting game as it is, but the second BB winning cannot be established when switching to the 3-bet game after winning the 2-BB. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. That is, when the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game in the internal state of carrying over the 1st BB winning continues endlessly, and when the 3-bet game is played when the 2nd BB is won, the game in the internal state of carrying over the 2nd BB winning continues endlessly.

Here, since the 1st BB winning is established only in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB winning is established only in the 2-bet game as described above, the 2nd BB winning is not established even if the 3-bet game results in no winning in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, and the 1BB winning is not established in the 2-bet game in which the 1BB winning is carried over. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB prize can be established in a 3-bet game or a structure in which the 1st BB prize can be established in a 2-bet game, if the internal state in which the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is carried over is to be continued, it will be necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for medal increase. Further, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the common bell is the main combination to increase medals in the 2-bet game, while the key combination to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pressing order bell. As for the common bell, any one of the first to sixth minor wins is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, whereas for the pressing order bell, the small win to be won differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加In other words, the fluctuation range of the medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when winning the bell in the pressing order is greater in the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game than in the 1BB state and 2BB state. Then, for example, when the winning order of the bell is won, the operation sequence (FIG. 23) of winning the first to sixth minor prizes is reported, thereby switching between AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) for assisting winning and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) for not assisting, thereby creating a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the winning of the second BB is carried over, neither the winning of the first BB nor the winning of the second BB occurs, and the game is continued in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise of a game in which the winning of the 2nd BB is carried over, the game property using notification (notification of pressing order) when winning the pressing order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following description) will be explained.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB and in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers, and 3 is set as the prescribed bet number in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state. The processing in steps S602 and S603 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. If there is no specific prescribed number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode processing (instruction function processing) from step S604 onwards.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and carry over the second BB to the normal game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 29, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance item A, chance item B, chance item C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode, and is set when it is possible to shift to the AT mode. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery, that the shift to the AT mode is confirmed, and that the AT mode shift has not yet been made. If neither flag is set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, continuation determination processing is executed in step S608, and AT addition processing is executed in step S609.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the shift to the AT mode regardless of whether the AT mode shift lottery is appropriate (without winning) when the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number, and is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the ceiling game number. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. Incidentally, as described above, since the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the ceiling counter is decremented in a game in which the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, and is not decremented in, for example, a two-bet game.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step S801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached 0 in step S802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps S803 to S808.

That is, in step S803, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode shift lottery is more likely to be won than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode shift lottery, and the CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU to grasp that it is the CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step S804, then at step S805, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, then in step S806, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ have respective winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery set according to the lottery results of the game. For example, in the case of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by chance A, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ wins the AT mode transition lottery more than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. is set to make it easier. Also, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After the AT mode shift lottery table is acquired in step S805 or step S806, AT mode shift lottery processing is executed in step S807 using the acquired shift lottery table and the game lottery result grasped in step S803. Then, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step S808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step S802, the AT mode winning process of steps S809 to S812 is executed. Further, when it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, a process for AT mode non-win win is executed in steps S813 to S816.

In the processing for winning the AT mode, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition in the CZ mode has been won. In the case of winning during the CZ mode, processing for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps S810 and S811. That is, in step S810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and when shifting to the CZ mode, a value (10) corresponding to the number of continuous games in the CZ mode (10 games) is input, and the counter is decremented by one each time the game is completed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S809, or after the process of step S811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step S812. Through such processing, affirmative determination is made in step S606 from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the game lottery result grasped in step S803. As shown in FIG. 29, the CZ mode shift lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the CZ mode shift lottery differs according to the lottery result of the game, and more specifically, the lottery result of the game that is easier to win the AT mode shift lottery is set to make it easier to win the CZ mode shift lottery. In other words, if the lottery results for a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won, but the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the game is set to easily shift to the CZ mode.

After the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery was won, and if not, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. In the case of CZ mode transition winning, in step S816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step S812 or step S816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect indicating that the lottery for transition to the AT mode or the lottery for the transition to the CZ mode is won is performed, and in the present embodiment, when the transition lottery is won, the winning transition lottery is notified after passing the portent modes of 0 game to 32 games.

In step S817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the number of predictive games is more likely to be selected than when the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is won, and when the lottery for transition is won with Cherry A, the number of predictive games is more likely to be selected than when the lottery for transition is won with Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step S817. As described above, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode is terminated regardless of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, so the player can grasp that the AT mode shift lottery is won through the termination of the CZ mode. Therefore, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the portent mode is set to 0 games, thereby reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the indication of the winning of the shift lottery being performed as the portent mode in spite of grasping that the AT mode shift lottery was won.

In subsequent step S818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step S817 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step S819, a process of setting the portent flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S820, a process of setting the portent command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT lottery process ends. The portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the portent mode is on, and the portent command is a command for the display control device 81 to grasp that the portent mode is set, the number of games in the portent mode, and which transition lottery is won. A display control device 81 that has received the portent command grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of winning shift lottery, and performs processing for executing the performance in the portent mode by an auxiliary display part 65 and a speaker 64.例文帳に追加

<Continuation determination process>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (e.g., 18) of games is set as one set (unit continuation number, unit state), for example, when updating the AT mode of one set (when starting a set or when ending a set), a continuation lottery for the next set is performed, and when the continuation lottery is won, the next set is shifted to after the set is finished, and when the continuation lottery is not won, the AT mode ends without shifting to the next set. Then, the continuation determination process in step S608 is a process for performing the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In step S901, it is determined whether the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18 or not. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter to which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is one set of AT mode start games. If the current game is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated. If it is the starting game, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter area 106e is zero. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set even if the continuation lottery is not won or the continuation lottery is not performed. If the AT set counter is 0, the winning probability of the continuous lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped in step S903.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the winning probability of the continuation lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation rate"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. The continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode (continuation rate setting processing in step S1211 described later). In step S903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read to grasp the current continuation rate of the AT mode.

After grasping the continuation rate in step S903, a continuation lottery process is executed in step S904. That is, when a continuation rate of 90% is selected, winning is continued with a probability of 90% in the process of step S904, and when a continuation rate of 10% is selected, winning is continued with a probability of 10% in the process of step S904.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the result of the process in step S904 is continuous winning.If continuous winning is determined, in step S906, a process of setting a continuous flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the continuation condition of the current set (condition for shifting to the next set) is satisfied. Then, in step S907, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the continuation determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S902 that the AT set counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT set counter is executed in step S908, and the process advances to step S906 to set a continuation flag and a continuation command, and then terminate the continuation determination process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without passing through the continuation lottery. It should be noted that the continuation lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be satisfied if the AT set counter is 1 or more in the case of continuation non-winning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of one set of the AT mode (when the start lever 41 is operated), it is determined whether or not the continuation condition is met to determine whether the AT mode will continue until the next set of the set to be started this time. In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing an effect assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of the current set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that it is not the continuation winning, the continuation determination processing is terminated as it is. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set in the AT mode, and no continuation command is output at the start of the set. A display control device 81 grasps that a continuation condition is not established by not receiving a continuation command at the start of a set, and performs processing for performing a performance on the premise that the continuation condition is not established as the performance of the current set.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT add-on process, an add-on lottery for adding the number of sets of AT mode is performed separately from the above-mentioned continuation lottery, and when winning in the add-on lottery, the process is continued to the next set regardless of the result of the continuation lottery of the next set.

First, in step S1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S1002, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the add-on lottery table is set with an add-on winning rate according to the lottery result of the game, and is set so that an add-on win is not possible in the normal role A to C, which are easy to win in the lottery process of each game, or the normal role such as the push-order bell, but can be added to the specific role such as the chance A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, common bell, and watermelon, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game. Among the specific combinations, for example, chance C is more likely to be additionally won than chance A, and cherry C is more likely to be additionally won than cherry A, so that a lottery result that is less likely to be won in lottery processing of each game is set to be more likely to be won in the extra lottery. It should be noted that, if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be won, and if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be performed. In addition, it is possible to have a configuration in which additional winning is possible even when the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, and the probability of additional winning in the normal combination is lower than the probability of additional winning in the case of a specific combination.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S1002, an additional lottery is executed in step S1003, and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step S1004. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step S1005, processing for setting the continuation flag is executed in step S1006. Then, in step S1007, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT addition process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

On the other hand, if the continuation flag is set in step S1005, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step S1008. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step S1008, it is determined that the AT mode will continue at least until the set following the current set. In the present embodiment, the AT set counter is uniformly incremented by 1 when winning the extra lottery, but a configuration may be employed in which a number of 2 or more may be added. For example, the number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the extra lottery.

In the subsequent step S1009, the processing for setting the set addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this processing for addition is finished. The set add-on command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp the fact that the add-on lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of sets may be added for one additional win, it is preferable to set information on the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the addition of the set by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27), after the process of step S607 or step S609 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps S610-S613.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification process executed in steps S610 to S613, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 33(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

In detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that at least the numerals "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

The display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display symbols of a plurality of patterns. Further, instead of eight segments, seven segments or nine segments may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential, and as long as the display can be controlled individually for each of the display segments N1 to N8, the segment display may be configured with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b), when the stopping operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", and the winning mode is advantageous for the player, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed as "1". In addition, when the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of ``right''→``left''→``middle'' as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in the game in which the start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition including the notification condition that the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the push order notification is satisfied. Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an interval in which the player can easily win in an advantageous manner by facilitating the notification of the operation order of the pushing order bell, etc., is defined as an advantageous interval (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is a zone indicator (specific reporting means) that lights up during the specified zone in which the benefits of the pressing order notification can actually be obtained in the advantageous zone, and turns off during the normal zone that is not the advantageous zone, or the non-specific zone that is not the specified zone even if it is the advantageous zone.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is arranged near the side of the payout number display portion 62 on the game panel 25. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, it is not arranged on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the game machine, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who progresses the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has its corresponding LED set to have a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display (e.g., the payout number display 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, twice the brightness of the surrounding display). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display parts are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. As for the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance is twice as high as the illuminance of the surrounding display units). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is lit is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (in the figure, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display part 65, the right stop switch 44 is the stop switch to be operated next, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 34(b), in the auxiliary display part 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is enlarged. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is enlarged on the auxiliary display section 65. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is set to be executed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. In this way, by performing the press order notification at the timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible to make the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 desired after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the order of pressing in steps S610 to S613 will be described.

That is, in step S610, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the pressing order bell is not won, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, the command monitor 68 is controlled in step S612 so as to notify the pressing order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Then, in step S613, after executing a process of setting a pressing order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning combinations as an output target to the display control device 81, the main pressing order notifying process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed. If the AT mode flag is not set in step S611, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1102. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1103. That is, the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 corresponds to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and is a processing of determining whether or not there is one specific prescribed number prescribed in association with the game state. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 or step S1103 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where the precursor flag is set means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery, the winning of these transition lotteries has not yet been notified. In this case, in step S1105, the precursor mode process is executed, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step S1104, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step S1106. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the process for the CZ mode is executed in step S1107, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag has not been set in step S1106, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the AT mode flag has been set. If the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress, the AT mode process is executed in step S1109, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1108, the winning result handling process is terminated.

The precursor mode process, the CZ mode process, and the AT mode process will be described below.

<Processing for precursor mode>
In the portent mode processing, as shown in FIG. 36, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step S1201. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has reached 0. If not, the precursor mode processing is terminated. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step S1203.

In the subsequent step S1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the current portent mode has been shifted based on the winning of the AT mode shift lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, processing for clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S1206, a CZ mode flag is set, and in step S1207, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step S1208, processing for setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this precursor mode processing ends. Upon receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 notifies the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the start of the CZ mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step S1204 and the current portent mode is the porting mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, then the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1209. Then, in step S1210, a process of setting an AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. In subsequent step S1211, a continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a predetermined number of games is set as one set, and the AT mode continues until the continuous lottery for the set is not won in a situation where there are no remaining sets (a situation where the AT set counter is 0).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the selection rate of a plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) is set differently according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process, and in step S1211, which continuation rate is to be selected is determined by lottery based on the set value. Specifically, it is basically set such that the higher the set value (the higher the set value for the payout rate), the easier it is to select a higher continuation rate. However, the continuation rate of 90% is more likely to be selected with the odd number setting than with the even number setting, and the setting value of 5 is the most likely to be selected. When the continuation rate of 90% is selected, the 90% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, when the continuation rate of 60% is selected, the 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and when the continuation rate of 10% is selected, the 10% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) indicating each of these continuation rates is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery for each set is performed at that continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step S1211, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step S1212. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games until one set of the AT mode is completed, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed. When the AT game counter becomes 0 and the continuation condition is established, the predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and when the AT game counter becomes 0 and the continuation condition is not established, the AT mode is terminated.

After that, in step S1212, a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and the precursor mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode.

<CZ mode processing>
In the CZ mode processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, processing for subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1301. In subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1301. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1303. After that, in step S1304, a process of setting a CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 notify that the CZ mode has ended. As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step S1303, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<AT mode processing>
In the AT mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1401. In subsequent step S1402, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1401. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the processing for shifting to the next set (steps S1404 to S1406) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S1403, processing for ending the AT mode (steps S1407 to S1410) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step S1403, a process of clearing the continuation flag is executed in step S1404. Then, in step S1404, 18 is input to the AT game counter, and in step S1406, the set update command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. After that, the AT mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the set update command executes processing for updating the effects of the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift to the set of the AT mode.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step S1403, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1407, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step S1408. Then, in step S1409, a process of setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. After that, in step S1410, a process of setting an AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT mode process is ended. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode termination command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the termination of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and is performed after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and after the display mode transition lottery (lottery result handling process) is performed based on the lottery result.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1501 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1503. Then, in step S1504, processing for setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1505, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval. Then, in step S1506, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition processing, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allow the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the transition to the advantageous section is set. The lottery for the ceiling counter is preferably performed using, for example, the set value, the lottery result of the game, or the like, and it is preferable to make it easier to select a shorter number of ceiling games as the setting is higher, or to make it easier to select a shorter number of ceiling games with an even number setting than with an odd number setting, or to make it easier to select a shorter number of ceiling games as the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. A value corresponding to the ceiling game number determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, an effect indicating the ceiling game number may be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step S1506, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step S1507.

If it is determined in step S1501 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1508 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1508, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after the display start processing is executed in step S1507 or after the display continuation processing is executed in step S1508, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If it is determined in step S1509 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then in step S1510 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1509 that any AT mode flag is set, in step S1511, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1510 or step S1511, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1512. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1513, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1512 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-seg display sections. The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68. By controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number.

In step S1513, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1512 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and display control of each display portion 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is performed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and up to four decimal places, such as "0.5012", is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur out of the total number of games. After executing the process of step S1513, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1512. Further, since the first display section 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display section 77a may not be provided, or the first display section 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S416 of the reel control process, and is executed after payout of medals (payout determination process) and transition of the game state based on the winning result (winning result handling process) are performed at the end of one game.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1602, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the subsequent step S1603, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the update process of MY in step S1603, on condition that the game result of this game is not a replay winning prize, the number of insertions (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the result of the subtraction is added to the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous interval MY, thereby updating the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous interval MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1603, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1604, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1605. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. In the remaining game number management process, for example, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, it is determined whether or not the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is greater than the advantageous zone increase/decrease number. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step S1606, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY has reached or exceeded the upper limit number of increases of 2400. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1607. In the subsequent step S1608, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is performed. Then, in step S1609, after executing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the section display second processing ends.

Regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step S1609, specifically, a process of resetting the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values is executed. For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and the RAM is cleared with respect to such variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1606 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1610 to determine whether or not the AT mode end flag is set. If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step S1607 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the advantageous section end processing is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step S1704, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or if the process of step S1704 has been executed, then in step S1705 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, there are an omen command, a continuation command, a set addition command, a push order notification command, etc. set in the lottery result handling process (Fig. 27). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or if the process of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a stop instruction command set in step S406 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1708, each stop operation time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or if the processing of step S1708 has been executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. Commands when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped are commands output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. In addition to the winning result command set in step S419 of the reel control processing (FIG. 22), the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, the second BB end command, the CZ start command, the AT start command, which are set in the bonus state processing (FIG. 24), the winning result correspondence processing (FIG. 35), etc. There are CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

When a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S1711, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) are set, effects are set based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected without going through the main controller 101, settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1706 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win). If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step S1803, setting is performed so that the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

If it is determined in step S1801 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning the specific role. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a rare combination that is difficult to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in the present embodiment, chance A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, and watermelon are set as the specific combination. As shown in FIG. 29, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results. In addition, in the AT mode extra lottery, when these special roles are won, the extra lottery can be won, but when the normal role such as the normal reply A is won, the extra lottery cannot be won. When the lottery result of the game this time is that the specific combination is won, a process of setting the specific combination notification effect is executed in step S1805. In the setting processing of the specific role notification effect, setting is executed so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 perform the specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the specific roles. As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S1802 or step S1804, or if the process of step S1803 or step S1805 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, it is determined whether or not a precursor command has been received as the current start command. When an omen command is received, an AT mode transition lottery or a CZ mode transition lottery is won, and the omen mode is set, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of omen games to a sub-side omen counter provided in a variety of counter areas 183b is executed in step S1807. The sub-side omen counter corresponds to the omen counter in the main controller 101, and is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the omen mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1806 or after the processing of step S1807 is executed, it is determined in step S1808 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than zero. If the sub-side predictor counter is greater than 0 and the predictor mode is on, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side predictor counter is executed in step S1809. Then, in step S1810, a process of setting an effect for the portent mode according to the value of the sub-side portent counter is executed. For example, the smaller the value of the sub-side omen counter, the more strongly suggesting that one of the transition lotteries has been won may be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

When a negative determination is made in step S1808, or after the processing of step S1810 is executed, AT effect setting processing is executed in step S1811, other start effect setting processing is executed in step S1812, and then this start effect setting processing ends. In step S1812, for example, processing for setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, extinguishing the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. The AT effect setting process will be described later in detail.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step S1710 in the effect setting process (FIG. 42) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the all-stop effect setting process is a process for setting effects when a newly received command is a win-win result command, first BB start command, second BB start command, first BB end command, second BB end command, CZ start command, AT start command, CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, or the like.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. When the CZ start command is received, in step S1902, processing for setting a sub-side CZ flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and in step S1903, effect setting processing for performing the CZ start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 45( a ), the CZ start effect displays that the CZ mode is started and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10) on the auxiliary display section 65 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not a CZ end command has been received. If the CZ end command has been received, at step S1905 processing for clearing the sub-side CZ flag is executed, and at step S1906 effect setting processing for performing the CZ end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the CZ end effect is set such that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 and the end of the CZ mode is notified. It should be noted that the CPU 181 sets the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect for the CZ mode in each game in which the sub-side CZ flag is set. The effect for the CZ mode is such that the background color, appearing characters, etc. are made different from those of the normal mode so that the player can recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. Further, when performing the effect for the CZ mode, the CPU 181 controls the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode to update (decrease) the display according to the progress of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not an AT start command has been received. If the AT start command has been received, in step S1908, a sub-side AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and in subsequent step S1909, 18 is input to the sub-side AT counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main control device 101 side. After executing the process of step S1909, the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed in step S1910. The sub-side set counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of AT mode sets.

In the subsequent step S1911, an effect setting process for performing an AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(a), an effect is set in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is performed. In addition, in the AT start effect, for example, the background or sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started so as to suggest the continuation rate.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not an AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed in step S1913, and the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S1914. For example, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the AT end effect includes a display indicating that the AT mode will end (character display such as "See you later"), and an effect of informing the number of consecutive sets in the current AT mode and the number of medals won.

If a negative determination is made in step S1912, it is determined in step S1915 whether or not a set update command has been received. When a set update command has been received and one set in the AT mode is completed and the next set is to be performed, processing for clearing the sub-side continuation flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S1916. The sub-side continuation flag corresponds to the continuation flag on the main controller 101 side. In the subsequent step S1917, it is checked whether or not an occurrence completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and if it is set, a process of clearing the occurrence completion flag is executed. The occurrence completion flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a predetermined specific effect has occurred in the set to end this time. The specific effect will be described in detail later, but in step S1917, when updating the set, a process of deleting information indicating that the specific effect has occurred in the set before updating is performed.

After executing the process of step S1917, the process of inputting 18 to the sub-side AT counter is executed in step S1918, and the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter is executed in step S1919.

After the processing of step S1903, step S1906, step S1911, step S1914, or step S1919 is executed, or after a negative determination is made in step S1915, other effect setting processing is executed in step S1920, and then the effect setting processing at all stop ends. In step S1920, processing is performed to perform effects corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and sound effects corresponding to automatic betting during replay are emitted from the speaker 64.

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, the AT effect setting process executed in step S1811 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 43) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The AT effect setting process is a process for performing an effect during the AT mode. Therefore, prior to explaining the AT effect setting process, the outline of the effect during the AT mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53. FIG.

<Overview of AT production>
As already explained, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of 18 games is set as a predetermined number, and when one set of games is completed, if the continuation condition is satisfied, the next set is started. In this embodiment, as a performance in one set, an ally character and an enemy character confront each other, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the ally character wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins. In this embodiment, the first half 10 games and the second half 8 games of one set of games have different productions, and the battle production in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters confront each other is carried out in the latter half part of the 8 games in the latter half, and the confrontation production in which the ally characters and the enemy characters face each other in the first half part of the 10 games is set.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the first game, a VS display effect (FIG. 52(a1)) is set as the confrontation effect in the first half, in which a friendly character and an enemy character facing each other are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In the 2nd to 4th games of the confrontation effect, a ally character up effect (FIG. 52(b1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays the ally character in a state of being enthusiastic with an aura behind them. In the 5th to 7th games of the confrontation effect, an enemy character up effect (FIG. 52(c1)) is set in which the enemy character illuminated by the moonlit night is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In the 8th to 10th games of the confrontation effect, a staring effect (FIG. 52(d1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays the friendly character and the enemy character glaring at each other while scattering sparks.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the 11th to 16th games, the attack effects of either the ally attack effect (FIG. 53(a)) in which the ally character attacks or the enemy attack effect (FIG. 53(b)) in which the enemy character attacks are repeated three times in total, and in the 17th game, the two-way attack effect is performed in which both sides attack each other. Then, when the continuation condition is satisfied, a teammate victory presentation (FIG. 53(c)) in which the teammate character wins in the 18th game, which is the final game of the set, is performed to shift to the next set.

As described above, in this embodiment, a set of performances is set such that the battle performance is performed after the confrontation performance, and the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified in the battle performance, thereby favorably raising attention to the contents and results of the battle performance.

As already explained, in the set management type AT mode of the present embodiment, a continuation lottery is performed at the start of one set to determine whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied.

Here, by adopting a configuration in which the continuation condition can be established based on the winning of the special role as described above, the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game can be preferably increased. In that case, even if an attempt is made to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result of the game by using the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the effect cannot be expected.

In particular, when attempting to optimize the playability and progress of the game in the AT mode by increasing the number of medals to be increased (net increase) per game in the AT mode, the number of games per set in the AT mode tends to decrease, and as described above, the phenomenon in which the continuation condition is met due to the specific role as a trigger is less likely to occur. In addition, since the upper limit of the number of games is set in the advantageous section, if the number of games in the normal mode or the CZ mode other than the AT mode is increased, or if an increase in the upper limit number of medals (2400 medals) can be expected in the AT mode, the number of games in the AT mode will naturally be reduced to increase the above-mentioned net increase number, and the event that the continuation condition will be satisfied due to the special role will be less likely to occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning the continuation lottery of the set, in the game before the notification of the winning of the continuation lottery (the above-mentioned teammate victory performance), even if the lottery result of the game is not a specific role, it is configured to notify as if winning the additional lottery.

By adopting a configuration in which the result of the continuation lottery is notified based on the lottery result of each game as described above, it is possible to give the impression that the success or failure of the continuation condition of each set is determined based on the lottery result of each game, rather than the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined by the continuation lottery at the time of renewal of each set.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for effecting each set during the AT mode as described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the AT effect setting process, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed in step S2001. Then, in step S2002, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as the current start command. As already explained, the continuation command is output when the continuation lottery is won at the start of one set (at the start of the first game of the set) (Fig. 31), and is output when the additional lottery is won in the set that did not win the continuation lottery (Fig. 32).

If a continuation command has been received in step S2002, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2003. Through such processing, the CPU 181 can grasp that the continuation condition of the current set is satisfied.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, or if the process of step S2003 has been executed, the process advances to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is greater than 7, thereby determining whether or not it is the 1st to 10th games of the set. In the case of the 1st to 10th games of the set, the processing for performing the confrontation performance as the first half part is executed in steps S2005 to S2008, and in the case of the 11th game to the 18th game, the processing for performing the battle performance as the second half part is executed in steps S2009 to S2013.

As the process for performing the confrontation effect, the process of acquiring the confrontation effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed in step S2005. As shown in FIG. 49, the confrontation performance table stores detailed performance contents of the confrontation performance (VS display performance, ally character-up performance, enemy character-up performance, face-to-face performance) to be executed in each game according to the value of the sub-side AT counter.

Here, as the confrontation performance, a normal performance and a specific performance are set, and when the continuation condition of the current set is established, the confrontation performance as the specific performance can occur. The specific effect is set as an effect in which a part of the effect content in the auxiliary display section 65 is different from the normal effect.

For example, in the VS display performance, the letters ``VS'' displayed between the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in white characters in the normal presentation, whereas the letters ``VS'' are set to be displayed in red letters in the specific presentation. In the ally character-up effect, the aura worn by the ally character is white in the normal effect, but is set to be displayed in rainbow color in the specific effect. In the enemy character-up effect, a crescent moon is displayed in the normal effect, while a full moon is displayed in the specific effect. In the face-to-face production, a girl character cheering for an ally character is displayed in the specific production, while the girl character does not appear in the normal production.

After acquiring the confrontation effect table in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step S2006, and if it is set, specific effect setting processing is executed in step S2007. The specific effect setting process is a process for setting whether or not to execute the specific effect in the confrontation effect in which the normal effect and the specific effect are set as described above.

<Specific effect setting process>
In the specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not the generated flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the specific effect has already been generated in this set, and is a flag that is set when the specific effect is generated. If the generated flag is set, the specific effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is set to occur only once in one set.

If the occurrence completion flag is not set, in step S2102, a process of ascertaining the lottery result of the current game is executed, and in step S2103, a process of ascertaining the continuation rate of the current AT mode is executed. Then, in step S2104, a process of acquiring a specific effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S2105, a specific effect lottery process is executed.

In the specific effect table, as shown in FIG. 51, the occurrence rate of the specific effect is set according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, in an AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, a specific performance is generated with a probability of 3.1% in a game of chance A, whereas a specific performance is generated with a probability of 20.0% in a game of chance B, and it is set so that the specific performance is more likely to occur as a result of the lottery of the game, as it is difficult to win. Moreover, in this embodiment, it is set so that a specific performance can occur not only for specific roles as so-called rare roles such as chance A and chance B, but also for normal roles such as normal reps A, normal reps B, normal reps C, and pressing order bell. In addition, it is set so that the specific effect can occur even if the result is a losing result in which none of the results are won.

In this case, for example, as a lottery result of each game, the winning order bell is won with a probability of about 65%, and in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, a specific effect is generated with a probability of about 3.8% triggered by the pushing order bell, so the probability of generating a specific effect triggered by the pressing order bell in each game is about 2.5%. On the other hand, for example, when cherry C appears, a specific performance is always generated, and since the winning probability is about 0.008% as a lottery result of each game, the probability that the specific performance is generated triggered by cherry C in each game is also about 0.008%, which is lower than the occurrence rate triggered by the pushing order bell.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a normal combination including normal reps A to C, and a result of being out of the pressing order bell is set to be higher than the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific combination of chance A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, common bell and watermelon. In the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, a specific effect occurs with a probability of about 5.5% (about 1/18.2) triggered by a normal role, whereas a specific effect occurs with a probability of about 0.8% (about 1/122) triggered by a specific role. A specific effect occurs with a probability of 1.0% (approximately 1/105).

In other words, although the odds of winning the specific effect lottery triggered by the specific role are set higher than the winning probability of the specific effect lottery triggered by the normal role, the normal role appears (wins) with a probability of about 96.4% (about 1/1.04) in each game, and the special role appears (wins) with a probability of about 3.56% (about 1/28.1) in each game. However, it is set so that the occurrence probability of the specific effect triggered by the specific role is higher than that of the occurrence of the specific effect, and the occurrence of the specific effect can be expected even if the lottery result of the game is a normal role.

In relation to the number of continuous games (10) of the confrontation effect in which the specific effect can occur, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator (about 18.2) of the probability of occurrence of the specific effect triggered by the normal role is larger than the number of games of the confrontation effect, but in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 90%, the denominator (about 7.52) of the probability of occurrence of the specific role triggered by the normal role is set to be smaller than the number of games of the confrontation effect. On the other hand, in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 10%, the denominator (approximately 122) of the occurrence probability of the specific performance triggered by the specific role is set to be larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation performance, and even in the AT mode of the continuation rate of 90%, the denominator (approximately 105) of the occurrence probability of the specific performance triggered by the specific role is set to be larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation performance. Therefore, under the condition that the continuation condition is satisfied, if the continuation rate is AT mode of 90% (even if it is 60%, it is not 10%), the probability is such that the specific performance triggered by the normal role can occur at least once on average.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect the additional winning even if it is a normal role while hoping for the additional winning triggered by the specific combination, and realize the game property which makes the player expect the additional winning in each game even in the AT mode with a small number of games.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the occurrence probability of the specific performance differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, and basically, even if the lottery result of the game is the same, the higher the continuation rate, the more likely the specific performance will occur. For example, the specific performance triggered by the push-order bell is set to occur with a probability of about 3.8% in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, whereas it occurs with a probability of about 12.5% in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%. . Therefore, the occurrence rate of the specific effect per game is about 6.3% if the continuation rate is 10%, whereas it is about 14.2% if the continuation rate is 90%. In the confrontation performance between 10 games, the probability of occurrence of the specific performance is about 48.0% in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 10%, and about 78.5% in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 90%, and it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode through the occurrence probability of the specific performance.

After executing the specific effect lottery process in step S2105, it is determined whether or not the lottery process wins in step S2106. In this case, the normal effect is executed in the current confrontation effect (step S2008 described later). If it is determined in step S2106 that the specific effect lottery has been won, then in step S2107 the process of grasping the specific effect corresponding to the value of the sub-side AT counter is executed. Specifically, for example, if the sub-side AT counter is 1, the specific performance of displaying the character display of ``VS'' in red characters is grasped as the current specific performance, and if the sub-side AT counter is 2 to 4, the specific performance of displaying the aura color of the ally character in rainbow colors is grasped as the current specific performance. Then, in step S2108, after executing the process of setting the generated flag, the specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT performance setting processing, when a negative determination is made in step S2006 or after the specific performance setting processing is executed in step S2007, the processing for setting confrontation performance performed by the auxiliary display part 65 and the speaker 64 in the current game is executed in step S2008, and then the AT performance setting processing is finished. In this case, when the specific performance is grasped in the step S2107, it is set so that the confrontation performance generating the specific performance is performed, and when the processing of the step S2107 is not performed (when negative determination is made in the step S2006 or step S2106), the confrontation performance generating the normal performance is set to be performed.

In this way, when the continuation condition is satisfied and the continuation flag is set on the main control device 101 side, the specific performance can be generated in the confrontation performance of the first half part of each set of the AT mode. Then, the occurrence of the specific performance is more likely to be triggered by the normal role than by the specific role, and furthermore, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the more likely the specific performance is to occur at an early stage.

In the AT effect setting process, the sub-side AT counter is 7 or less in step S2004, and when it is the second half part, the process for performing the battle effect is executed. That is, in step S2009, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7, it is the 11th game of one set, and it is the 1st game of the battle effect. When the sub-side AT counter is 7, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and when it is set, in step S2011, a battle performance table for continuation is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and processing for selecting the battle performance to be performed in the current set from the acquired performance table by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50, the continuation battle performance table is for notifying that a ally victory performance is generated in the final game of the set and the continuation condition is established, and a plurality of performance tables (PA1 to PA8) with different combinations of ally attack performance and enemy attack performance are set in the 11th to 16th games of the set. Which effect table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, the effect table (PA1) in which the friendly attack effect occurs three times in a row is set so that the AT mode with 10% continuation is most likely to be selected and the AT mode with 90% continuation is least likely to be selected. It is set to be the least likely to be selected. For example, the effect table (PA7) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → enemy attack effect can be selected in the AT mode of 10% continuation and the AT mode of 90% continuation, but not selected in the AT mode of 60% continuation. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of the AT mode by the combination and order of effects). In step S2011, one effect table is selected from the continuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

When it is determined in step S2010 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, in step S2012, a discontinuation battle performance table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and processing for selecting the battle performance to be performed in the current set from the acquired performance table by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50, the non-continuing battle performance table is for notifying that the ally defeat performance occurs in the final game of the set and the continuation condition is not satisfied, and a plurality of performance tables (PB1 to PB8) with different combinations of ally attack performance and enemy attack performance are set in the 11th to 16th games of the set. Which production table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, the production table (PB1) in which the enemy attack production occurs three times in a row is set so that the AT mode with 60% continuation and the AT mode with 90% continuation are more likely to be selected than the AT mode with 10% continuation. AT mode and 90% continuous AT mode are set to be more easily selected. For example, the effect table (PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect can be selected in the 90% continuous AT mode, but not selected in the 10% continuous AT mode or the 60% continuous AT mode. A performance table (PB8) that occurs three times in a row can be selected in the AT mode of 10% continuation, but not selected in the AT mode of 60% continuation or the AT mode of 90% continuation, so that the continuation rate of the AT mode can be predicted or grasped by the selected performance table (combination and order of each attack performance). In step S2012, one effect table is selected from the discontinuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

Comparing the continuous battle effect table and the non-continuous battle effect table, for example, in the effect tables (PA3, PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect, when the battle effect ends with the ally victory effect, it is suggested that the AT mode is 90% continuous. When the battle effect occurs in , the AT mode with 10% continuation is suggested, and when the battle effect ends with the ally defeat effect, it is confirmed that it was the 10% continuation AT mode.

In the 11th game of the set, the effect table for the current battle effect is selected in the processing of steps S2011 and S2012, and after performing the storage processing of the address information of the selected effect table, in step S2013, the process of setting the battle effect of the current game to be performed by the auxiliary display part 65 and the speaker 64 is executed, and then the AT effect setting process is finished.

On the other hand, if the sub-side AT counter is not 7 in step S2009, but the 12th game or later of the set, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set and the set address information of the battle presentation is the address field information (PB1 to PB8) corresponding to the ally defeat presentation. Affirmative determination in step S2014 means that although the continuation condition was not established until the battle presentation was set in the 11th game, the continuation condition was established thereafter. In this case, in step S2015, the battle effect to be performed in the current set is reselected from the continuation battle effect table, and the address information of the reselected effect table is stored (overwritten) in the address information storage area 183c.

In this case, a battle presentation table for overwriting is selected from the battle presentation table for continuation according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, regardless of the friend attack presentation or the enemy attack presentation executed in the previous game. By doing so, when the continuation condition is met in the middle, the relationship between the continuation rate and the combination of the ally attack presentation and the enemy attack presentation in the battle presentation becomes different from the case where the continuation condition is met from the beginning. In the present embodiment, since the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect are set as a set of two games, for example, if the above continuation condition is satisfied in the second game of the ally attack effect (enemy attack effect), and the overwrite battle effect table is set to perform an enemy attack effect (ally attack effect) different from the attack effect before overwriting in this game (second game), the effect may be performed according to the effect table before overwriting in this game, and the effect may be performed according to the effect table after overwriting in this game. In addition, it may be set to perform a counter effect that switches to an enemy attack effect (ally attack effect) even though an ally (enemy) has launched an attack.

When a negative determination is made in step S2014 or after the processing of step S2015 is executed, the process advances to step S2013 to execute the processing of setting the battle performance of the current game to be performed by the auxiliary display part 65 or the speaker 64 according to the value of the sub-side AT counter, and then this AT performance setting processing is finished.

<Flow of production in AT mode>
Next, the flow of effects in each set during the AT mode will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, when the AT mode is started with the game ta1, in the first set continuing until ta5, the first half part from ta1 to ta3 (precisely the game immediately before the game started at ta3) is the first half part in which the confrontation effect is executed, and the second half part from ta3 to ta5 (precisely the game immediately before the game started at ta5) is the second half part in which the battle effect is executed.

Further, the continuation lottery process (step S904) in the continuation determination process (FIG. 31) is performed at the start of the game ta1. For example, if the ta1 continuation lottery results in a continuation winning, the continuation flag is set. This continuation flag is cleared in the AT mode process of the winning result handling process in the game immediately before the next set continuation determination of the current set, that is, in the game immediately before the game started at ta5 (in the figure, it is shown to be cleared at ta5).

When the continuation flag is set, in the first half part from ta1 to ta3, a specific effect can occur in the confrontation effect. For example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the game is that the specific effect lottery is won at ta2, which is the normal combination, and the specific effect occurs. In this case, the generated flag is set with the occurrence of the specific effect of ta2, and the specific effect does not occur in the set.

In the second half part from ta3 to ta5, the battle performance is executed, and the ally victory performance is executed in the final game of the battle performance, and the notification that the continuation condition is established (continuation notification) is executed (ta4). In this case, the continuation notification allows the player to grasp that the next set will be started. However, the player who grasps that the continuation condition is satisfied by the specific performance of ta3 can enjoy the battle performance started from ta3 while knowing the result (whether it is a victory performance or a defeat performance) and being immersed in a sense of superiority. Therefore, in order to enjoy the sense of superiority and to feel relieved to know early that the continuation condition is established, the performance of the specific performance is not overlooked, and the degree of attention to the confrontation performance is preferably increased.

When the next set starts at ta5, the continuous lottery process is executed at ta5, and the continuous non-winning is assumed at ta5. In this case the continuation flag is not set. For example, in the game ta6 which is in the first half part, if an additional win is made with a special combination as a trigger, the continuation flag will be set in the game ta6.

Here, the specific performance lottery in the present embodiment is set to be executed according to the lottery result of the game regardless of whether or not the game wins the additional lottery, and the specific performance may not occur in the game winning the additional lottery. Therefore, for example, even if the continuation flag (and the sub-side continuation flag) is set at ta6 where the extra win is made and the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific performance may be generated triggered by the normal combination at ta7 thereafter. In the figure, an example is shown in which the specific effect occurs in the game ta7, which is different from the game ta6 in which the additional winning is made, but of course, the specific effect may occur in the game of ta6 in which the additional winning is made.

In the battle effect from ta8 to ta10, since the continuation flag is set as described above, the battle effect is performed in the effect pattern in which the continuation notification as the ally victory effect is executed at ta9 immediately before ta10.

When the next set starts at ta10, the continuation lottery process is similarly executed at ta10, and the continuation flag is not set if the continuation non-winning at ta10. When the set started at ta10 is not won until ta13 when the set ends, the specific performance is not generated in the first half part from ta10 to ta11, and in the battle performance from ta11 to ta13, the battle performance is performed according to the performance pattern in which the ally defeat performance is executed at ta12 immediately before the ta13. Then, the AT mode ends at ta13.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the second half part of each set, no specific performance is generated, and only by looking at the battle performance of the second half part, it is set so that it is not possible to determine whether or not the continuation condition is established until the ally victory performance or ally defeat performance is executed in the final game. In other words, in a configuration in which a specific performance corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can occur before the teammate victory performance as a continuous notification of the establishment of the continuation condition is performed, a situation in which the specific performance cannot occur (the second half part) intervenes between the situation in which the specific performance can occur (first half part) and the final game in which the continuous notification can occur. By doing so, the rarity of the specific performance is increased by limiting the situation in which the specific performance can occur, and while it is possible to draw a strong interest in the specific performance, it is possible to avoid the decrease in attention to the battle performance itself in the second half part due to wishing for the occurrence of the specific performance.

As already explained, the probability of occurrence of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. FIG. 55(a) shows the AT mode with 10% continuation, and FIG. 55(b) shows the AT mode with 90% continuation.

For example, in the 10% continuous AT mode started at tb1, the continuation condition is met in the first set up to tb6, the continuation condition is not met in the second set from tb6 to tb10, and if the AT mode ends in the second set, an ally victory presentation is executed as a continuous notification at tb5 immediately before tb6, and an ally defeat presentation is executed at tb9 immediately before tb10.

Further, for example, in the 90% continuation AT mode started at tc1, assuming that the continuation condition is met in the first set up to tc6 and the second set from tc6 to tc10, the ally victory presentation as continuous notification is executed at tc5 immediately before tc6 and at tc9 immediately before tc10.

As already explained, the specific effect can occur in the first half of the set in which the continuation condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the AT mode with 10% continuation, the specific effect can occur in the games from tb1 to tb4, which are the first half of the first set, but not in the games from tb6 to tb8, which are the first half of the second set. On the other hand, in the 90% continuation AT mode, the specific effects can occur in the games from tc1 to tc4, which are the first half of the first set, and from tc6 to tc8, which are the first half of the second set.

However, after the specific performance is generated, the specific performance is not generated even in the first half part of the set in which the continuation condition is established, so that, for example, when the specific performance is generated in the game of tb3 from tb1 to tb4 in the 10% continuous AT mode, the specific performance is not generated in the game of tb3 to tb4. Further, for example, when a specific performance occurs in the game of tc2 from tc1 to tc4 in the 90% continuous AT mode, or in the game of tc7 from tc6 to tc8, the specific performance does not occur in the game of tc2 to tc4 or tc7 to tc8.

As described above, the higher the continuation rate in the AT mode, the more likely the specific effect occurs, so the game tb3 in which the specific effect occurs in the AT mode with 10% continuation tends to be a later game than the game tc2 in which the specific effect occurs in the AT mode with 90% continuation. By doing so, a game for predicting the continuation rate of the AT mode is added from the number of games until the specific performance is generated, and the interest of the game can be improved by diversifying the way of enjoying the AT mode.

Here, as described above, in each set of the AT mode, it is considered that the player advances the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the specific effect at an earlier stage. In this respect, the period during which the user can enjoy whether or not the specific performance is generated is the period from tb1 to tb3 in the 10% continuous AT mode, and the period from tc1 to tc2 in the 90% continuous AT mode, and the length of the period per set is longer in the 10% continuous AT mode. By doing so, even in the AT mode with a low continuation rate, it is possible to keep the player entertained for a longer period of time as to whether or not the specific effect will occur, and thus the amusement of the game can be favorably improved.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a situation where the continuation condition of the AT mode set is satisfied, a specific performance lottery for executing a specific performance corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition according to the lottery result of each game is conducted before continuing the AT mode set, and the specific performance is performed when the specific performance lottery is won. By doing so, while attention is focused on whether or not each set in the AT mode is continued, the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is increased by expecting that the specific performance corresponding to the continuation is performed.

In this case, the winning probability of the specific performance lottery differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, and the setting is made so that the higher the continuation rate, the easier it is to win the specific performance lottery, so that the generation of the specific performance not only indicates that the continuation condition of the set is established, but also indicates that the continuation rate of the AT mode is high depending on the occurrence timing. Therefore, by performing the specific effect, it is possible to draw attention to the game, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Although it is set so that it is easier to win the specific effect lottery when the game lottery result is a specific role than when it is a normal role including a loss, considering the probability that the game lottery result will be a specific role and the probability that it will be a normal role, the ratio of the specific effect triggered by the specific role (the product of the winning probability of the specific role and the winning probability of the specific effect lottery during the specific role) Since the product is set to be larger, even if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, it is possible to expect the occurrence of the specific effect.

In this case, each set of the AT mode has 18 games, and among them, the number of games in which the specific effect can occur is 10 games in which the confrontation effect is performed. The denominator of the probability of winning the normal role is set to be smaller than 10, and the denominator of the probability of winning the special role is set to be larger than 10. Precisely because of such a probability, chances of winning a specific role in each set are rare, whereas chances of winning a regular role are likely to occur frequently, thus increasing the significance of enabling the occurrence of a specific performance triggered by a regular role as described above, and making it possible to more favorably achieve the effect of increasing the attention of each game before continuing the set by using the specific performance.

After executing the specific performance, a generated flag is set so that the specific performance can be generated only once per set, so that the rarity of the specific performance can be increased, and the degree of attention to the specific performance can be increased by utilizing the psychology of the player who tries not to miss the specific performance.

Since the performance mode of the specific performance is different in each game in which the confrontation performance is performed, there is a high possibility that the specific performance will be overlooked as compared with a configuration in which the specific performance is performed in the same performance mode. By doing so, the degree of attention to the specific performance can be increased, and furthermore, in the configuration in which success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the battle performance after that, the degree of attention to the battle performance can also be increased.

In a set in which the continuation condition is not established, the continuation condition can be established by winning the additional lottery in the AT addition processing according to the lottery result of each game. In this case, when the additional lottery is won, the specific performance can occur during the confrontation performance, so that the lottery result of each game can be closely associated with the occurrence of the specific performance, and it is possible to give an impression as if the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game without going through the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In the add-on lottery, it is set so that the add-on winning is won in the specific role but not in the normal role. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that the set is not continued in spite of the winning of the special role as a so-called rare role, and to secure the relationship between the special role and the success or failure of the continuation condition.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the continuation condition is established by the additional winning, the specific performance is not performed unless the specific performance lottery is won, and the execution of the specific performance may be restricted when the additional winning is won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the specific performance in the normal role, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game in which the normal role is won.

The winning probability of the additional lottery is common regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode. On the premise of such a constitution, by giving the impression that the continuation condition is established according to the lottery result of each game by the specific performance, even in the AT mode in which a low continuation rate is set, the AT mode may actually be continued by the player's trick, and the effect of giving the impression that the continuation condition is established according to the lottery result of each game can be enhanced.

In addition, even if a continuation condition is established by winning an additional prize during the battle performance, the specific performance is not performed, so that the result of the battle performance performed over a plurality of games is not completely understood in the middle, and the degree of attention to the battle performance can be secured favorably.

In the AT mode set, a specific performance corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition of the set can be executed during the confrontation performance, and then the set is updated through a battle performance in which the specific performance cannot be executed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to overlap of the specific performance as an advance notice of the establishment of the continuation condition and the battle performance informing the success or failure of the continuation condition, and to suitably expect the performance effect of each performance.

In this case, in the AT performance setting process, the performance pattern of the current battle performance is determined from each battle performance table based on success or failure of the continuation condition regardless of whether or not the specific performance is executed during the confrontation performance. By doing so, for example, there is no need to store in advance the performance pattern when the specific performance is performed, and for example, even if the specific performance is performed but the specific performance is overlooked, the inconvenience of noticing the miss afterward through the performance of the battle performance of the performance pattern when the specific performance is performed can be prevented. In this case, in order to solve such an inconvenience, it is conceivable to take measures to make the specific effect more flashy so that the specific effect is not overlooked. However, if the effect pattern of the battle effect is determined regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed in the first place, as in the above configuration, it is possible to make the effect assuming that the specific effect can be overlooked, and the degree of attention to the specific effect can be enhanced.

In the continuation determination process on the main controller 101 side, only the continuation rate is referred to when updating the AT mode set, and the lottery result of the game at the time of updating is not referred to. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the continuous lottery is being performed when the set is updated, and it is possible to help give an impression as if the continuous lottery is being performed according to the lottery result of each subsequent game.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game is an additional winning game (regardless of whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set), the specific performance is performed through the specific performance lottery, but in this modified example, a configuration will be described in which the specific performance is positively performed in the additional winning game. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, after executing the process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received in step S2202. If a continuation command has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2203. The processes of steps S2201 to S2203 are the same as the processes of steps S2001 to S2003. In this modification, after setting the sub-side continuation flag in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 8 to 16 in step S2204, thereby determining whether or not it is the 2nd to 10th games of one set of AT mode. If it is the 2nd game to the 10th game, in step S2205, a process of setting a specific effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. The specific effect flag is a flag for generating a specific effect in a game in which an extra win is made.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202 or step S2204, or after the processing of step S2205 is executed, processing for setting the effects in the current game is executed in steps S2206 to S2215. The processing of steps S2206 to S2215 is the same as the processing of steps S2004 to S2013 except for the specific effect setting processing of step S2209.

In the specific effect setting process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, it is determined in step S2301 whether or not the generated flag is set, and if it is set, the specific effect setting process is terminated. If the generated flag is not set and the specific effect is not generated in this set, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the specific effect flag is set. If not set, in steps S2303 to S2309, processing for generating a specific effect is executed. The processing of steps S2303 to S2309 is the same as the processing of steps S2102 to S2108.

When the specific effect flag is set in step S2302, the process of clearing the specific effect flag is executed in step S2310. Then, the process proceeds to step S2308 to execute processing for grasping the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter, and after executing the processing to set the generated flag in step S2309, the specific effect setting process is terminated. In this case, in the confrontation effect setting process of step S2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, in the case of a set that has not been won in the continuation lottery, if the game is the first half part, the specific performance will be generated in the game if the game is the first half part when the special role is the trigger. Therefore, the lottery result of each game and the occurrence rate of the specific performance are more closely related, and the impression that the continuous lottery is performed based on the lottery result of each game rather than the result of the continuous lottery performed when each set is updated can be strengthened, and the impression that the result of the continuous lottery is notified by the specific performance can be enhanced.

In a game in which a continuation lottery is performed, even if an additional lottery is won, a specific performance flag is not set and a specific performance is prevented from occurring without going through the specific performance lottery. In other words, when the continuation lottery is won, the continuation command is output, but in the game in which the continuation lottery is performed, even if the continuation command is received, only the sub-side continuation flag is set and the specific performance flag is not set. In this way, the display control device 81 is configured not to be able to distinguish between the winning of the continuation lottery of the set and the winning of the additional lottery, thereby avoiding an increase in the number of types of commands and making it possible to perform the specific performance without contradiction with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the additional lottery is not won in a situation where the continuation condition is established, a specific effect is generated. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in this modification.

In the AT add-on process in this modified example, the process when it is determined that the add-on win has not been made in step S2404 is different. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set in step S2410. If the continuation flag is set, it is determined in step S2411 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any special combination. If the continuation flag is not set in step S2410, or if the continuation flag is set in step S2411 but it is a normal combination, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. When the continuation flag is set and the addition lottery triggered by the specific role is not won, in step S2412, after executing the processing of setting the non-win command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT addition processing is finished.

The processing of steps S2401 to S2409 is the same as the processing of steps S1001 to S1009.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing specific effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, if the generated flag is not set in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the non-winning command has been received as the command at the start of the current game. When the non-winning command is not received, a process for generating a specific effect is executed in steps S2503 to S2509. The processing in steps S2501 and S2503 to S2509 is the same as the processing in steps S2201 to S2108.

On the other hand, in step S2502, the non-win command is received, and although the continuation condition has already been satisfied in the first half of the set, in the current game, the additional lottery triggered by the specific role is not won, and if the specific performance is not generated yet, the affirmative determination is made in step S2502, and the process proceeds to step S2508. Then, in step S2508, a process for ascertaining the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter is executed, and in step S2509, a process for setting the generated flag is executed, and then the specific effect setting process is terminated. In this case, in the confrontation effect setting process of step S2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the specific effect in the game in which the specific role is won without excessively increasing the winning probability of the additional lottery. Therefore, by performing the specific performance in the game in which the specific role is won, the continuation lottery of the set can be boosted to give the impression that it is performed in each game instead of when the set is renewed, and the degree of attention of each game in each set can be preferably increased.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the effect table of the battle effect selected in the second half part can be changed depending on whether or not the specific effect occurs in the first half part of the set. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, the sub-side AT counter is 7, and the processing of the start game of the second half part (the 11th game of the set) is different. In other words, the processing for the first half of steps S2601 to S2608 is the same as the processing of steps S2001 to S2008. If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7 and it is the start game of the second half part.

If the determination in step S2609 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag has been set. As already explained, the generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that a specific effect has occurred in the first half of the set.

When the occurrence completion flag is not set and the specified performance is not generated even if the continuation condition is satisfied, the performance table of the current battle performance is selected from the battle performance tables for continuation in step S2612, and the processing of storing the address information of the selected performance table is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S2011, and the effect table is selected by lottery according to the continuation rate of the AT mode this time.

On the other hand, in step S2611, when an occurrence completion flag is set, a continuation condition is established, and a specific performance is generated, a predetermined specific performance table is selected from the battle performance tables for continuation as the performance table of the current battle performance in step S2613, and processing for storing address information of the selected performance table is executed. In this modified example, the performance table of the address information PA1 is set as the specific performance table, and in the battle performance after the specific performance occurs, the battle performance of the performance pattern in which the ally attack performance is continuously generated three times and the ally victory performance is performed is executed.

When the sub-side continuation flag is not set in step S2610, the performance table of the current battle performance is selected from the battle performance tables for discontinuation in step S2614, and the address information of the selected performance table is stored. In step S2609, when the sub-side AT counter is not 7, it is determined whether or not the continuation condition is met after shifting to the battle performance in step S2616. Then, after executing any of the processes of steps S2612 to S2614 and step S2617, or when a negative determination is made in step S2616, the battle effect setting process of the current game is executed in step S2615, and then the AT effect setting process ends. The processing of steps S2614 to S2617 is the same as the processing of steps S2012 to S2015.

In this way, even though the occurrence of the specific performance is known, the battle performance in which the ally character is highly likely to be defeated is not performed, so that contradiction in performance can be prevented, and the processing configuration for performing the battle performance can be simplified because there is no need to select the performance pattern of the battle performance even when the specific performance is occurring.

Moreover, with the above configuration, when the specific effect occurs, it becomes impossible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode from the effect pattern of the battle effect. By doing so, it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode purely from the occurrence timing and occurrence rate of the specific performance without relying on other information such as the performance pattern of the battle performance, and the degree of attention to the specific performance can be preferably increased.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, after the specific effect occurs, the setting value suggestion effect occurs according to the lottery result of the game. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect setting process in this modified example. Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in this modified example, as the effect setting of the first half part in the AT effect setting process, after performing the setting process of the facing effect in step S2008, the suggestive effect setting process of FIG. 61 is executed. That is, the suggestive effect setting process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 as one process in the effect setting process for the first half of the AT mode.

In the suggestive effect setting process, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not the generated flag is set. If it is not set, the suggestive effect setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in this modified example, the suggestive effect is not generated in a situation where the specific effect is not generated. If the occurrence completion flag is set, the process advances to step S2702.

In step S2702, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and in step S2703, the process of grasping the setting value is executed. Then, in step S2704, the continuation rate of the current AT mode is grasped, in step S2705, a process of acquiring a suggestive effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S2706, a suggestive effect lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 62, the suggestive effect table in this modified example is set such that the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect differs according to the set value, the continuation rate, and the lottery result of the game. Specifically, it is set so that the suggestive effect can occur when the lottery result of the game is a losing result, and is set so that the suggestive effect does not occur for other results. In addition, it is set so that the higher the set value (the higher the setting) the higher the ball-out rate is, the more easily the suggested performance is generated, and the higher the continuation rate is in the AT mode, the more easily the suggested performance is generated.

Note that the suggestive effect in the present modification is set as an effect suggesting a high setting and as an effect suggesting a high continuation rate, but an effect suggesting whether the set value is even or odd, an effect suggesting that the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, or an effect confirming that the set value is a predetermined value (for example, setting 6) may be provided.

After the suggesting performance lottery processing is executed at step S2706, it is determined whether or not the suggesting performance lottery is won at step S2707, and if the winning is determined, at step S2708, the suggesting performance setting processing is finished after the suggesting performance setting processing is executed so that the suggesting performance is performed by the auxiliary display part 65 or the speaker 64.例文帳に追加Although a detailed description with reference to drawings is omitted, the suggestive effect may be, for example, a mode in which the content of the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is different from that when not generated (for example, a predetermined character appears), a mode in which the sound effect from the speaker 64 is different from that when not generated (for example, a special sound effect is generated), or a mode in which these modes are combined. If it is determined in step S2707 that the game has not been won, the suggestion effect setting process is terminated.

In this way, by performing the specific performance, the setting value suggestive performance can be performed after that, so that the performance of the specific performance not only makes it possible to grasp the level of the continuation rate and the success or failure of the continuation condition, but also serves as an opportunity to start the set value suggestive performance, and the player's psychology that wants to grasp the set value can be used to improve the expectation for the performance of the specific performance.

In this case, since the suggestive performance can be generated according to the lottery result of the game after the specific performance is performed, it is possible to maintain the effect of increasing the attention to the lottery result of each game even after the specific performance aiming at the effect of improving the attention to the lottery result of each game is performed.

Furthermore, since the suggestive effect is performed based on the result of failure, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the number of medals held, and the negative image of the result of failure can be eliminated.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the effect content of each set in the AT mode is changed. In this modification, in a set management type AT mode in which 18 games as a predetermined number are set as one set, if a condition for continuing to the next set is established, a predetermined specific performance is generated until the 18 games are completed, and if the condition for continuing to the next set is not satisfied, the AT mode is finished without generating the specific performance until the 18 games are completed. In order to distinguish the specific effect in this modified example from the specific effect in the first embodiment, the specific effect in this modified example will also be referred to as a second specific effect in the following description. In the following description, when a specific effect (specific effect lottery, specific effect lottery process, etc.) is referred to, it means that not only the specific effect in the first embodiment but also the second specific effect is included, and the same applies to the specific effects (third specific effect, fourth specific effect) in the other embodiments.

Specifically, in this modified example, a plurality of variable areas for numeric characters are provided in the auxiliary display section 65, and a predetermined combination of numeric characters that stop in the plurality of variable areas generates the second specific effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, as the variation areas of the numeric characters, the left variation area SP1, the middle variation area SP2, and the right variation area SP3 are set in order from the left, and the number characters 1 to 9 are set as the number characters to be displayed in these variation areas SP1 to SP3. Then, when each game is started, the numerical characters in these variable areas SP1 to SP3 are vertically variably displayed, and each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the numerical characters are stopped in order from the left. Then, when all the characters with the same number stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3, the second specific effect occurs (FIG. 64(a)), and when the characters with the same number stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 are not aligned, the non-second specific effect occurs (FIG. 63(a), FIG. 63(b)).

When the AT mode set is started, a pattern variation effect such as variation of the variation areas SP1 to SP3→stop is performed for each game. For example, as shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), when the non-second specific effect is reached and the number characters stop in the variable areas SP1 to SP3, the symbol variable effect is performed again in the next game. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(a), when the number characters stop in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 as the second specific effect, in the remaining games of the set, as shown in FIG. 64(b), a jackpot effect is performed. In this modified example, as the jackpot effect, a close-up display of the ally character screaming is set on the auxiliary display unit 65, but for example, a movie effect or the like that is executed over a plurality of games may be set, and the effect content may be changed as appropriate.

In this modification, in a specific game in which the number of remaining games in one set is very small (for example, 5 remaining games to 2 remaining games) in a situation where the second specific effect has not occurred, a standby effect is performed instead of the symbol variation effect (Fig. 65(a)). In this modified example, an effect is set as the standby effect in which the ally character is enthusiastically wearing an aura. That is, during the period in which the standby effect is performed, the symbol variation effect is not performed, and the second specific effect and the non-second specific effect do not occur. Then, in the final game, the symbol variation performance is executed again, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the second specific performance is generated in the final game, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the non-second specific performance is generated in the final game, and the AT mode is terminated.

The standby effect described above can occur not only in a specific game with a small number of remaining games, but also in the middle of a set, when a predetermined lottery for occurrence is won. In this case, a standby effect is generated over a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 games) from the game in which the generation lottery is won, and then the symbol variation effect is executed. In this case, in the symbol variation effect after the predetermined number of games, the second specific effect does not occur unless the lottery for generating the second specific effect is won even if the continuation condition is satisfied.

A processing configuration for generating such a second specific effect will be described below.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In step S2801, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. In step S2802, the display of the number of remaining games of the set displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is updated in accordance with the update of the sub-side AT counter. Specifically, in this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the number-of-remaining-games image GP corresponding to the number of remaining games of each set is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the upper right) of the auxiliary display section 65. In step S2802, the processing of updating the number-of-remaining-games image GP according to the value of the sub-side AT counter is performed.

In the next step S2803, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as the current game start command, and if it has been received, a sub-side continuation flag is set in step S2804. If a negative determination is made in step S2803, or if the process of step S2804 has been executed, the process advances to step S2805.

In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the occurrence completion flag is set. If the generated flag is not set, the process advances to step S2805 to determine whether or not the sub side AT counter is 1 to 4, thereby determining whether or not it is the 14th game to 17th game (remaining 5 games to 2 games) of the set and the specific period in which the number of remaining games of the set is small and the standby effect should be executed. If the sub-side AT counter is 5 or more (before the 13th game) or if the sub-side AT counter is 0 (last game), it is determined in step S2806 whether or not the standby effect flag is set in the flag storage area 183a. The standby effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the game should execute the standby effect outside the specific period, and is set when the lottery for generating the standby effect is won. If the standby effect flag is not set, the second specific effect setting process is executed in step S2807, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. Further, when the sub-side AT counter is 1 to 4, or when the standby effect flag is set, the standby effect setting process is executed in step S2808, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. Then, when it is determined in step S2804 that the generated flag is set, in step S2809, a process for setting the big win effect (FIG. 64(b)) to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then this AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Second specific effect setting process>
In the second specific effect setting process, as shown in FIG. 67, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S2901. In the subsequent step S2902, a process for grasping the current AT mode continuation rate is executed. Then, in step S2903, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, in step S2904, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 0 and the current game is the final game of the set.

If it is not the final game of the set, the process advances to step S2904 to determine whether or not an occurrence standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generation standby flag is a flag that is set when the generation lottery for the second specific performance is won during execution of the standby performance. When the occurrence waiting flag is not set, in step S2906, the process of acquiring the second specific effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S2907, the second specific effect lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 69, the second specific effect table, like the specific effect table of FIG. 51, determines the winning probability of the second specific effect lottery based on the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode, and is set so that the second specific effect lottery can be won not only for the specific combination but also for the normal combination including the losing result.

After executing the second specific effect lottery process in step S2907, it is determined whether or not the second specific effect lottery is won in step S2908. When it is determined in step S2904 that it is the final game of the set, when it is determined in step S2908 that the second specific effect lottery has been won, or when it is determined in step S2904 that an occurrence standby flag has been set, and after that in step S2909 the generation standby flag is cleared, in step S2910 a process for setting the second specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display part 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 64(a), in the symbol variation effect of the current game, a second specific effect is generated in which characters with the same number are stopped in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3. The type of number character to be stopped in the second specific effect is randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, for example, the number characters that are likely to be selected may differ depending on the value of the AT set counter (the number of remaining continuous sets). For example, if the AT set counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the odd number characters stop together, and if the AT set counter is less than the predetermined number, the even number characters stop together. Further, for example, the number characters that are likely to be selected may be different depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, if the continuation rate of the AT mode is a predetermined rate (for example, 60%) or more, odd number characters stop together, and if the AT set counter is less than the predetermined rate, even number characters stop together. Furthermore, characters with numbers that are likely to be selected are made different according to the set value set in the process of setting the winning probability. For example, if the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, set 3), odd-numbered characters stop together, and if the set value is less than the predetermined number, even-numbered characters stop together. Moreover, you may combine these.

Thereafter, after setting the generated flag in step S2911, the second specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the generated flag, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, affirmative determination is made in step S2804, and the process for setting the jackpot effect in step S2808 is performed. When the second specific effect set as described above is the final game of the set, the next game is the first game of the updated set, and the symbol variation effect is started again.

If it is determined at step S2903 that the sub-side continuation flag has not been set, or if it is determined at step S2908 that the second specific effect lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, processing for setting so that the non-second specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), in the symbol variation effect of the current game, a non-second specific effect occurs in which the characters of the same number do not align in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 and stop. Note that the number characters that stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, in order to maintain the expectation of the occurrence of the second specific effect until the end of the game, it is preferable to make it easier to select the out-of-reach mode (FIG. 63(a)) in which the number characters that stop in the left variation area SP1 and the middle variation area SP2 are the same, and the number characters that stop in the right variation area SP3 are different (FIG. 63(a)), rather than the variation mode (FIG. 63(b)) in which the number characters that stop in all the variation areas SP1 to SP3 are different.

In the subsequent step S2913, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is greater than 10 and it is the 1st to 7th games of the set. If it is up to the 7th game, in step S2914, standby effect generation lottery processing is executed. In the standby effect generating lottery process, a standby effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and whether or not to generate the standby effect is decided by lottery according to the lottery result of the current game. As shown in FIG. 69, the standby effect table is set so that the game lottery results that are less likely to be won are more likely to win the standby effect lottery, and more specifically, it can be said that the game is set so that it is possible to win a specific role but not to win a normal role.

At step S2915, it is determined whether or not the standby effect lottery has been won. When winning, at step S2916, processing of inputting 4 to a waiting performance counter provided in various counter areas 183b is executed, and after executing processing of setting a waiting performance flag at step S2917, the second specific performance setting processing is terminated. The value input in step S2916 corresponds to the number of games in which the standby effect is performed, and in step S2913, it is determined whether or not the number of games for executing the standby effect remains if the standby effect lottery is won.

Then, by setting the standby effect flag in step S2917, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, and the standby effect setting process of step S2808 is performed. If it is the 8th game or later in step S2913, or if the standby effect lottery is not won in step S2915, the second specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process in step S2808 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and in step S3002, processing of grasping the continuation rate of the AT mode of this time is executed. Then, in step S3003, it is determined whether or not the standby performance counter is larger than 0, and when it is larger than 0, that is, when the standby performance set in the current game is the standby performance triggered by winning the standby performance lottery, processing for subtracting 1 from the standby performance counter is executed in step S3004. Then, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not the standby effect counter has become 0, and when it becomes 0, a process of clearing the standby effect flag is executed in step S3006.

If a negative determination is made in step S3005 or after the processing of step S3006 is executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, in step S3008 it is determined whether or not the occurrence standby flag is set. If the generation waiting flag is not set, in step S3009, the process of acquiring the second specific effect table is executed, and in step S3010, the second specific effect lottery process is executed. The processing of steps S3009 and S3010 is the same as the processing of steps S2906 and S2907.

After executing the process of step S3010, it is determined whether or not the second specific effect lottery is won in step S3011, and if the lottery is won, the process of setting an occurrence standby flag is executed in step S3012. As a result of such processing, affirmative determination is made in step S2905, and the second specific effect is generated in the first game after execution of the waiting effect based on the final game of the set in the AT mode or the waiting effect lottery.

If the standby effect counter is 0 in step S3003, and the standby effect set in the current game is a standby effect triggered by the fact that the number of remaining games in the set has become small, if the sub-side continuation flag is not set in step S3007, if the occurrence standby flag is set in step S3008, if it is determined that the second specific effect lottery is not won in step S3011, or if the process of step S3012 is executed, step S3 is performed. At 013, after executing the process of setting so that the standby effect is performed by the auxiliary display portion 65 and the speaker 64, the standby effect setting process is terminated.

That is, during 4 games from the remaining 5 games to the remaining 2 games of the set and during the 4 games after winning the standby performance generation lottery, the standby performance is performed instead of the symbol variation performance regardless of the result of the second specific performance lottery processing. In this case, the pattern variation performance performed in the final game (remaining one game) of the set is the second specified performance if the continuation condition of the current set is satisfied, and is the non-second specified performance if the continuation condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, the pattern variation performance performed in the first game after the standby performance triggered by winning the waiting performance generation lottery can generate the second specific performance by the result of the second specific performance lottery for the total game including the four games in which the standby performance was executed, and the probability is overwhelmingly higher than the occurrence rate of the second specific performance in the other games (see FIG. 69).

As described above, by performing the specific performance (second specific performance) in each game with the symbol variation performance, it becomes possible to more clearly notify whether or not the second specific performance has occurred in the current game, and it becomes easier to give the player an impression as if the establishment of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of each game.

In this case, a waiting performance in which no pattern variation performance is performed can be generated, a second specific performance lottery is performed even in a game in which the standby performance is performed, and when the second specific performance lottery is won, the second specific performance is performed in the first game after the standby performance, so that the degree of attention to the pattern variation performance in the first game after the standby performance is dramatically increased. Moreover, since the standby performance is executed even when the number of remaining games in each set is very small, and the final game of the set is the first game after the standby performance, the degree of attention to the final game of the set is successfully increased in relation to the standby performance that may occur in the middle.

In other words, the game in which the standby performance is performed is a game in which the execution of the second specific performance is restricted, and by performing the second specific performance lottery itself even in the game in which the execution of the second specific performance is restricted, the degree of expectation for the generation of the second specific performance can be varied according to each game in which the symbol variation performance is performed, not limited to the final game of the set.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, in a set management type AT mode in which 18 games as a predetermined number are set as one set, 10 games, which is a smaller number than the 18 games, are set as one set for performance, and when a specific performance occurs in one set for the performance, the set is shifted to a new set for performance at that time. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this embodiment from the specific effect (second specific effect) in the first embodiment, the specific effect in this embodiment is also referred to as a third specific effect. In addition, in order to distinguish the performance set set for the 10th game from the AT mode set set for the 18th game, the AT mode set is also called an AT set, and the performance set is also called a pseudo set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), in this embodiment, when the AT mode is started, an opening effect is performed over eight games in the first AT set. For example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the opening effect is to congratulate the start of the AT mode, and display the number of games until the start of the pseudo-set on the auxiliary display section 65 (OP game number image OG).

When the 8 games for the opening effect are finished, the pseudo set is started. In the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70(a), using the symbol variation effect in the first embodiment, an effect is produced in which either a third specific effect in which the characters with the same number are stopped in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 and a non-third specific effect in which the characters with the same number are not aligned in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 70(b1), when performing a pseudo-set effect, the number-of-remaining-games image GP in the first embodiment is displayed in association with the number of remaining games of the pseudo-set. For example, the remaining game number image GP in FIG. 70(b1) shows the first game (remaining 10 games) in the pseudo set, and the display of the remaining game number image GP is updated at the start of the game.

In the effect in the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70(b2), there are cases where the third specific effect occurs until the final game in which the number-of-remaining-games image GP becomes 1, and in other cases, as shown in FIG.

When the third specific effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 70(b3), an update effect is generated to indicate a shift to the next pseudo set. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b4), after the update effect has occurred, the number of remaining games in the next pseudo set is reset to 10, and 10 is displayed as the number of remaining games image GP. Also, the number-of-sets image CP indicating the number of pseudo sets is displayed after being updated to a value corresponding to the number of sets of the next pseudo set (updated from 2 to 3 in the figure). In this way, when the third specified performance occurs before the final game in the pseudo set, the number of remaining games in the pseudo set is newly set regardless of the number of remaining games in the pseudo set, and this is repeated as long as the third specified performance occurs.

In this case, the update effect indicating the transition to the next pseudo set can be said to be a continuation notification for notifying that the continuation condition of the pseudo set is satisfied. However, the continuation notification in the first embodiment is for notifying that the condition for continuation of the set managed by the main controller 101 is satisfied, while the continuation notification in the present embodiment is for notifying that the condition for continuation of the pseudo set managed by the display control device 81 is satisfied.

When the third specific effect does not occur until the final game of the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70(b6), a non-update effect indicating that the pseudo set is not updated occurs. After the non-renewal effect occurs, the ending effect is executed over seven games as shown in FIG. 70(a), and the AT mode ends after the ending effect ends.

As the ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), a effect is set in which the face of the ally character whose eyes are closed is displayed close-up on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. Also in the ending effect, the ED game number image EG is displayed corresponding to the number of remaining games of the ending effect, and the display of the ED game number image EG is updated as the game is completed.

Before the number of remaining games of the ending effect becomes 0, if the continuation condition is established by winning an extra lottery or the like, the effect by the pseudo set is resumed through the resurrection effect in which the appearance of the ally character's wide-eyed eyes is displayed on the auxiliary display part 65 as shown in FIG. 71(c).

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing each effect in this embodiment will be described.

<Processing for precursor mode>
First, changes in processing on the main controller 101 side in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the portent mode processing in the winning result handling processing is different from that of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, in this embodiment, the process for starting the AT mode is partially different when the precursor counter becomes 0 in step S3102 and it is determined in step S3104 that the current precursor mode is the precursor mode triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery. That is, the AT mode win flag is cleared in step S3109, the AT mode flag is set in step S3110, and the continuation rate of the current AT mode is set in step S3111. Then, in this embodiment, in step S3113, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed, and then in step S3114, a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Note that the processing of steps S3101 to S3112 and step S3114 is the same as the processing of steps S1201 to S1213.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the set management type AT mode in which one set of 18 games is set, the continuation condition is always established in the first set.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 101 also executes the process for updating the AT set (continuation determination process) every 18 games, and if the conditions for continuing the AT set are satisfied, the 18 games of the AT set are completed and then the process for shifting to a new AT set is performed, and if the conditions for the continuation of the AT set are not satisfied, the 18 games of the AT set are completed and then the AT mode is terminated (AT mode process).

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, changes in the AT effect setting process on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3201, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main controller 101 side, as in the first embodiment, and corresponds to the number of remaining games in each set on the main controller 101 side. In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as a command at the start of the current game, and if it has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S3203.

If a negative determination is made in step S3202, or if the process of step S3203 has been executed, the process advances to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether the sub-side set counter is 1 or not. As in the first embodiment, the sub-side set counter corresponds to the number of AT mode sets set on the main controller 101 side, and in step S3204, it is determined whether or not it is the first AT set.

If it is the first set, the process advances to step S3205 to determine whether the sub-side AT counter is 10 to 17 and it is the 1st to 8th games of the first set in the AT mode. In the case of the 1st to 8th games of the 1st set of the AT mode, the processing for performing the opening performance is executed in steps S3206 to S3208, and in the case of the 9th game of the 1st set of the AT mode and after, the processing of performing the 3rd specific performance is executed in the step S3209, and then the AT performance setting processing is terminated.

That is, if it is the 1st to 8th games of the 1st set, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 10 and it is the 8th game. If it is the eighth game, in step S3207, a process of setting 10 to the pseudo AT counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The pseudo AT counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the pseudo set. In step S3206, if the game to be started this time is the eighth game of the first set in the AT mode, it means that the pseudo set will be started from the next game, and the processing of step S3207 is the processing for setting in advance the number of games of the pseudo set to be started from the next game.

If a negative determination is made in step S3206, or after the process of step S3207 is executed, the opening effect (FIG. 71(a)) is set to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S3208, and then the AT effect setting process ends. In the process for performing the opening effect, the process for updating the display of the number of games (OP game number image OG) until the start of the pseudo set is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

If, in step S3204, the sub-side set counter is not 1 and it is not the first set in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, it is determined whether or not an ending flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The ending flag is a flag that is set when the number of games in the pseudo set is completed without the third specific effect occurring as described above, and the ending effect (FIG. 71(b)) should be performed. If the ending flag is not set, a third specific effect setting process is executed in step S3209.

On the other hand, if the ending flag has been set, the flow advances to step S3211 to determine whether or not the sub-side continuation flag has been set. When the ending flag is set and the sub-side continuation flag is set, it means that the continuation condition is established by winning the extra lottery on the side of the main controller 101 after the performance by the pseudo-set is finished. If the sub-side continuation flag is not set, in step S3212, the process of setting the ending effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. In addition, in the processing for performing the ending effect, processing for updating the display of the number of games until the end of the ending effect (ED game number image EG) is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

Also, when it is determined in step S3211 that the continuation condition is established by winning an additional lottery on the main control device 101 side after the end of the effect by the pseudo set, the process of clearing the ending flag is executed in step S3213, and then in step S3214 the process of setting the resurrection effect (FIG. 71(c)) to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed, and then the AT effect setting process is ended.

<Third specific effect setting process>
In the third specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, first, in step S3301, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo effect counter is executed, and in step S3302, a process of updating the number of remaining games image GP of the pseudo set is executed. In the subsequent step S3303, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set.

If the sub-side continuation flag is set, it is determined in step S3304 whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (10th game of the pseudo set). If it is not the final game, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S3305, the continuation rate of AT mode is grasped in step S3306, the third specific effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a in step S3307, and the third specific effect lottery process is executed in step S3308. The processes of steps S3305 to S3308 correspond to the processes of steps S2102 to S2105.

As shown in FIG. 75, the third specific effect table in this embodiment is set so that the rate of occurrence of the third specific effect differs depending on the result of the game lottery and the continuation rate of the AT mode. Further, as a lottery result of the game, it is set so that the third specific performance can be generated not only for a specific role as a so-called rare role but also for a normal role including a losing result, and the occurrence rate of the third specific performance according to each lottery result calculated from the product of the winning probability of the lottery result of the game and the winning probability of the third specific performance lottery is set to be higher for the regular role than for the specific role.

In relation to the continuation rate of the AT mode, the higher the continuation rate in each lottery result, the more likely the third specific effect is to occur. Therefore, the higher the continuation rate, the higher the occurrence rate of the third specific effect per game. In other words, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the more likely the third specific performance is generated in a smaller number of games in the quasi-set and the more likely it is to shift to the next quasi-set. By doing so, the difference in the number of pseudo sets tends to be larger than the difference between the actual number of AT sets when the continuation rate is high and the actual number of AT sets when the continuation rate is low. Therefore, the difference in the number of pseudo-sets in appearance becomes larger than the actual difference in the number of balls put out (the difference in the number of games or sets actually played in the AT mode) due to the high or low continuation rate of the AT mode, and it is possible to prevent the rate of pay-out from rising even though the performance is favorably performed when a high continuation rate is selected.

After executing the third specific effect lottery process in step S3308, it is determined whether or not the third specific effect lottery is won in step S3309. If the third specific effect lottery is won, a process for setting the third specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S3310. Further, when it is determined in step S3304 that the sub-side continuation flag is set and it is the final game of the pseudo set, processing for performing the third specific effect is executed in step S3310.

In subsequent step S3311, after the third specific effect set in step S3310, the update effect (FIG. 70(b3)) is set to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. Then, after executing the process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter in step S3312, the third specific effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the sub-side continuation flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S3313. In step S3313, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and the game to be started this time is a game updated to a new set on the main controller 101 side (first game of AT set). If it is not a new set update game, in step S3314, a process of setting so that the non-third specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. Then, in step S3315, it is determined whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (the tenth game of the pseudo set). If it is the final game, in step S3316, after the non-third specific effect set in step S3314, the non-updated effect (FIG. 70(b6)) is set to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. Then, after executing the process of setting the ending flag in step S3317, the third specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the ending flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 from the next game, and the ending effect is performed. If it is not the final game of the pseudo set in step S3315, the third specific effect setting process is terminated.

Here, a case will be described in which it is determined that it is the first game of the relevant AT set in a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S3313 and the sub-side continuation flag is not set. In this case, the process advances to step S3310 to execute setting processing for generating the third specific effect. In other words, when the main controller 101 side does not win the continuation lottery performed when the AT mode set is updated, the third specific effect is generated in the game. Then, the third specific effect is generated in the first game of the final set of the AT mode (the set not won in the continuation lottery), and the pseudo set is started from the second game of the final set. Then, the non-third specified effect is executed over 10 games in the pseudo set, and the non-updated effect is performed after the non-third specified effect in the 11th game of the AT set which is the final game of the pseudo set. After that, the ending effect is executed over seven games from the 12th game of the AT set, and the AT mode ends. By doing so, regardless of the number of games of each set in the AT mode on the main control device 101 side, it is possible to carry out the pseudo set in which the third specific performance does not occur in the final set of the AT mode, even though the pseudo set is updated by the performance.

<Update of AT mode set and update of pseudo set>
How the AT mode set is updated on the main controller 101 side and how the pseudo set is updated on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the AT mode is started at td1, in the first set of the AT mode from td1, the opening effect is performed until td2, which is the seventh game (remaining 12 games). From td3, which is the 8th game (11 remaining games) in the 1st set, the pseudo set effect is performed.

As already explained, under the condition that the continuation flag (sub-side continuation flag) is set, in the pseudo set effect, the third specific effect is generated according to the game lottery result or the AT mode continuation rate regardless of the number of remaining games in one set managed by the main control device 101 side, and if the third specific effect is not generated until the number of remaining games in the pseudo set managed by the display control device 81 becomes 0, the third specific effect is generated regardless of the game lottery result or the AT mode continuation rate.

For example, in the first set of the AT mode started from td1, when the third specific performance occurs in the game of td4 before the number of remaining games of the pseudo set becomes 0, the pseudo set is updated through the update performance. Then, from the next game td5, the next pseudo set is started with 10 remaining games. Then, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode started from td1 becomes 0 at td6, since the continuation flag is set, the process for updating the set (steps S1404 to S1406) is executed, and the second set is started from the next game of td7. Then, at td7, a continuation lottery is executed when the set is updated. For example, if the continuation lottery executed at td7 is won, the continuation flag is set again.

Further, for example, in the second set of the AT mode started from td7, when the third specific performance is not generated until the number of remaining games in the second set of the pseudo set becomes 0, the third specific performance is generated at td8 when the number of remaining games becomes 0. Then, the third pseudo-set is started from the next game td9.

Similarly, when the number of remaining games in the second set of the AT mode started from td7 becomes 0, the continuation flag is set, so the process for updating the set is performed as described above, and the third set is started at td10. Then, if the continuation lottery held at td10 is also won, the continuation flag is set again.

In the pseudo-set performance on the display control device 81 side, the pseudo-set performance is continued by generating the performance (third specified performance) for updating the pseudo-set at any time until the continuation lottery on the main control device 101 side is not won.

At td11 when the number of remaining games in the third set of the AT mode started at td10 becomes 0, the process for updating the set is performed again. However, if the continuation lottery is not won at td12 when the next 4th set is started, the continuation flag is not set.

In this case, the display control device 81 generates the third specific effect in the pseudo set effect in td12, which is the starting game of the fourth set in the AT mode. Then, a new pseudo set (seventh set) is started from td13, which is the game following the game at td12 in which the third specific effect is generated. In the 7th pseudo set, the non-third specific effect occurs over 10 games, and the 7th pseudo set continues until td14 of the 11th game in the 4th set of the AT mode. In this case, the non-update effect is generated at td14, and the ending effect is performed from td15, which is the next game of the current game. The ending effect continues over seven games, and ends together with the AT mode at td16 when the number of remaining AT mode games becomes zero.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a set management type AT mode, a pseudo set performance is performed over 10 games, which is shorter than the number of games in the AT set, 18 games, and when a third specific performance occurs during the pseudo set performance, the game is shifted to a new pseudo set regardless of the number of remaining games of the pseudo set. By doing so, the pseudo set performance is performed with the number of repetitions larger than the number of repetitions of the AT set, and the end of the pseudo set performance can be matched well with the final game of the AT mode while expecting the effect of giving the impression that the AT mode continues for a long time.

More specifically, in a game in which the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 18 games, which is more than 10 games, which is the number of continuous games of the pseudo set presentation (the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, and the remaining number of games is less than double the 10 games of the pseudo set), the third specific presentation is generated to update the pseudo set. By doing so, if the third specific performance is not generated in the updated pseudo set, the pseudo set performance can be terminated when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches 8 games. In this case, in the present embodiment, the ending effect is performed for the remaining seven games, and it is possible to adjust the end game of the AT mode and the end game of the pseudo set effect without discomfort.

In the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games for performing a new pseudo set is ensured even if the pseudo set is updated in any game. Therefore, in the AT set in which the continuation condition is established, the third specific performance is generated through the third specific performance lottery processing, so that the timing of the generation of the third specific performance during the pseudo set performance (game in which the pseudo set is updated) can be made random, and the performance effect of the pseudo set performance can be preferably enhanced.

In this case, success or failure of AT mode continuation conditions is determined by the main control device 101 side, and pseudo set performance is performed by the display control device 81 side, and the display control device 81 side grasps success or failure of the continuation conditions of the AT set that is currently being executed, and only differentiates whether the third specific performance is generated at random in the pseudo set performance or when the AT set is updated. By doing so, the end game of the AT mode and the end game of the pseudo set performance can be well adjusted while the functions are decentralized as a configuration in which separate control devices are responsible for managing whether or not to continue the AT mode and the performance during the AT mode.

In particular, since the display control device 81 side determines whether or not to generate the third specific effect without going through the third specific effect lottery process, it is the first game of the AT set, so the determination is made only once in 18 games. Therefore, it is possible to expect an overwhelming effect of reducing the processing load compared to a configuration in which the determination is made every game.

Also in this embodiment, the third specific effect lottery is configured to be performed according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. Therefore, the lottery result of each game and the occurrence of the third specific performance are linked, so that the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction in generating the third specific performance by his/her own trick, and can also play a game of predicting the continuation rate of the AT mode from the occurrence rate of the third specific performance, so that the degree of attention to the generation of the third specific performance can be preferably increased.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, in the AT mode set update game (the first game in the AT set), the third specific effect is more likely to occur than in other games. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the third specific effect setting process in this modified example.

In the third specific effect setting process in this modified example, the sub-side continuation flag is set (step S3403: YES), and the contents of the third specific effect lottery are different when it is not the final game of the pseudo set. Specifically, after grasping the lottery result of the current game and the AT mode continuation rate (steps S3405 and S3406), it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and the game to be started this time is the first game of the AT mode set. If it is not the first game, the third specific effect table is acquired in step S3408, and the third specific effect lottery process is executed in step S3410. The third specific effect table is the same as that of the second embodiment (FIG. 75). On the other hand, if it is the first game of the AT mode set, after acquiring the third specific effect table at the time of update from the various table storage area 182a in step S3409, the third specific effect lottery process is executed in step S3410.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the update-time third specified effect table, the occurrence rate of the third specified effect is set according to the game lottery result and the AT mode continuation rate, as in the case of the third specified effect table. For example, in an AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, in the case of normal reply A, the third specified performance occurs with a probability of 2.0% in the third specified performance table, while the third specified performance occurs with a probability of 6.0% in the third specified performance table at the time of updating.

After the third specific performance lottery processing is executed in step S3410, it is determined whether or not the generation lottery is won in step S3411, and if the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S3412 to perform processing for generating the third specific performance. Also, if the game is not won, the process advances to step S3416 to perform processing for generating a non-third specific effect. The processing of steps S3401 to S3406 and steps S3410 to S3419 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3317.

As described above, on the premise that the pseudo set is updated by generating the third specific effect in the first game of the AT set, in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the third specific effect is likely to occur in the first game of the AT set, in which the continuation condition is satisfied. This makes it difficult to perceive the occurrence of the third specific effect in the first game of the AT set as a sign that the continuation condition is not satisfied, and successfully camouflages the third specific effect in the first game of the AT set, in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. can. Therefore, it becomes difficult to guess the success or failure of the continuation condition on the AT set side, and it becomes possible to enjoy the pseudo-set presentation more purely.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described second embodiment, the number of games in which the ending effect is performed is uniformly set to a predetermined number (7), but in this modified example, it is changed. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the third specific effect setting process in this modified example.

In this modified example, the processing is different when it is determined in step S3503 that the sub-side continuation flag has not been set. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S3503, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and it is the first game in the AT mode set. If it is the first game, it is determined in step S3514 whether or not the pseudo AT counter is smaller than 7 and it is the fourth game or later of the pseudo set. If it is the fourth game or later, the process advances to step S3510 to execute a process for performing a third specific effect. If the game to be started this time is up to the third game of the pseudo set, the continuation rate of the AT mode is grasped in step S3515, and the setting value set in the winning probability setting process is grasped in step S3516. Then, in step S3517, a process of acquiring the ending game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S3518, a process of determining the number of games for the current ending effect in the AT mode by lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 80, the number-of-ending-games table is set so that the number of ending games to be selected differs according to the continuation rate of the AT mode and the set value. For example, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the set value is 3 or 4 than when the set value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is more likely to be selected. Also, even in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the set value is 3 or 4 than when the set value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is more likely to be selected. When the set value is 1 or 2 and when the set value is 3 or 4, the average value of the number of ending games is smaller in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 90% than in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 10%, and a shorter number of games is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the set value is 5 or 6, for example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the number of ending games of 1 game is most likely to be selected, while in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the number of ending games of 7 games is most likely to be selected, and the higher the continuation rate is, the more the number of ending games is likely to be selected. In other words, the setting value does not tend to be high even if the number of ending games is short, and the setting value is set so that the setting value can be narrowed down in relation to the continuation rate of the AT mode. By doing so, it becomes more meaningful to predict the continuation rate before reaching the ending, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect.

Here, the situation in which the ending effect is performed is basically the case where the AT mode ends without the set continuation condition being established, so even if the continuation rate can be grasped by the ending effect, it is difficult for the player to obtain useful information. However, as described above, the occurrence probability of the third specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate, and the continuation rate is configured to be predictable from the occurrence probability of the third specific effect before the ending effect occurs. Therefore, the setting value is predicted from the continuation rate predicted before the ending effect and the number of games of the ending effect, and the information of the continuation rate is necessary after the fact in order to predict the setting value, and by making the information of the continuation rate necessary after the fact, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect.

After lottery processing for the number of ending games is performed in step S3518, the process advances to step S3719 to perform processing for subtracting the number of ending games determined in step S3518 from 7, which is the maximum number of ending games, and input the calculated value to the ending waiting counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The ending standby counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the game in which the third specific effect is generated in accordance with the start of the ending effect.

After executing the process of step S3519, it is determined whether or not the ending wait counter is 0 in step S3520. For example, if the number of ending games is selected as 3, the value to be input to the ending wait counter in step S3519 is 4, and a negative determination is made in step S3520. If a negative determination is made in step S3520, the process proceeds to step S3521 and executes processing for generating a non-third specific effect. The processing of steps S3521 to S3524 is the same as the processing of steps S3314 to S3317.

If a negative determination is made in step S3513, and it is determined that it is not the first game of the set in which the continuation condition is not established, it is determined in step S3525 whether or not an occurrence completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the third specific effect has already been generated in the set in which the continuation condition is not established. If the occurrence completion flag is not set, in step S3526, a process of subtracting 1 from the ending wait counter is executed.

After executing the process of step S3526, the process advances to step S3520 to determine whether or not the ending wait counter has become zero. If not 0, as described above, the flow advances to step S3521 to perform processing for generating the non-third specific effect. When the ending waiting counter becomes 0, after executing the process of clearing the generated flag in step S3527, the process proceeds to step S3510 and executes the process for generating the third specific effect. The processing of steps S3501 to S3512 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3312.

Further, when the generated flag is set in step S3525 and the third specific effect has been generated, the process proceeds to step S3521 to execute the process for generating the non-third specific effect.

As described above, by making the number of ending games variable instead of the fixed number of 7 games, the game in which the third specific performance is generated in the AT set in which the continuation condition is not established is not limited to the first game of the AT set, but is random. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to grasp whether or not the AT set is continued from the update timing of the pseudo set, and it is possible to enhance the effect of entertaining the pseudo set presentation.

Moreover, in the above configuration, since the setting value can be estimated based on the number of ending games, not only the disappointment of ending the AT mode but also the fun of predicting the setting value can be provided when the ending effect is performed, and the decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suitably compensated.

In this case, the setting value can be estimated and narrowed down based on not only the number of ending games but also the continuation rate of the AT mode. Therefore, the importance of estimating and grasping the continuation rate of the AT mode is increased before the ending performance is performed, and it is possible to draw more attention to the occurrence of the third specific performance.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the occurrence probability of the third specific effect is changed. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a third specific effect table in this modified example.

The third specific effect table in this modified example is set so that the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the less likely the third specific effect will occur, and the lower the continuation rate, the more likely the third specific effect will occur. Specifically, considering the lottery results of each game, in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, there is a probability of about 71.5% per game, and in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, there is a probability of about 1.5% per game. Under the condition that the continuation condition is established, the pseudo set lasts 10 games at maximum, the AT mode with 10% continuation lasts about 1.4 games, and the AT mode with 90% continuation lasts about 9.3 games.

In addition, as already explained, in the present embodiment, a pseudo-set effect is performed with 10 games as one set, and when the third specific effect occurs between the ten games, the new pseudo-set is updated regardless of the number of remaining games. That is, the probability of updating the pseudo set increases as the third specific effect is more likely to occur.

The average number of continuous sets in the AT mode is about 2.1 sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation and about 7.9 sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation. On the other hand, in the pseudo set, the update probability of the pseudo set is higher in the AT mode with 10% continuation as described above, and the average value of the number of pseudo sets is about 4.4 sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation and about 6.8 sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation. Therefore, in the AT mode with 90% continuation, 1.5 times as many pseudo sets as in the AT mode with 10% continuation continue, and the difference in the continuation rate in the number of pseudo sets is smaller than the difference in the continuation rate in the actual number of sets in the AT mode.

Also, in the 60% continuous AT mode, about 3.5 sets are continued, so the 60% continuous AT mode has a smaller average continuous number of sets than the 90% continuous AT mode. However, the average value of pseudo sets is about 9.0 sets in the 60% continuous AT mode and about 6.8 sets in the 90% continuous AT mode, so the 60% continuous AT mode has more pseudo sets than the 90% continuous AT mode. That is, the average number of AT sets and the average number of pseudo sets are reversed according to the continuation rate, and the lower the continuation rate, the larger the average number of pseudo sets.

The relationship between the AT mode continuation rate and the pseudo set update probability will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82(a) shows an example of a pseudo set effect in the 10% continuous AT mode, and FIG. 82(b) shows an example of a pseudo set effect in the 90% continuous AT mode.

For example, in the 10% continuation AT mode, the first set starts at te1, and the pseudo set effect starts from te2 when the opening effect ends. In this case, although the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set of the AT mode started at te1 and the second set of the AT mode started at te5, the continuation condition is not satisfied in the third set of the AT mode started at te11, and the AT mode ends at te13 after the ending performance started at te12.

As described above, in the AT mode of 10% continuation, if the continuation condition is satisfied, the third specific effect is generated with a probability of about 71.5% in each game. In the figure, after the first set of the pseudo set effect is started from te2, the third specific effect is generated from te3 to te11, and after 10 sets of pseudo sets are performed, the ending effect is generated.

On the other hand, in the 90% continuation AT mode, the first set starts at tf1, and the pseudo set effect starts at tf2 when the opening effect ends. In this case, the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set of the AT mode started at tf1, the second set of the AT mode started at tf4, the third set of the AT mode started at tf7, and the fourth set of the AT mode started at tf11.

As described above, in the 90% continuation AT mode, if the continuation conditions are satisfied, the third specific effect occurs at a probability of about 1.5% in each game, which is lower than the 10% continuation AT mode. It shows that the ending effect occurred after the was performed.

That is, in this case, the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation is 3 sets, and the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation is 5 sets, whereas the number of pseudo sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation is 10 sets, and the number of quasi sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation is also 10 sets.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a specific performance is generated in the pseudo set performance in the second embodiment, the jackpot performance is executed over a predetermined number of games (4 games to 14 games), and then the pseudo set performance is performed again. Then, when the specific effect does not occur in the pseudo set effect, the AT mode ends when the prescribed number of games (10 games) of the pseudo set effect is completed. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this embodiment from the specific effects in the other embodiments, the specific effect in this embodiment is also referred to as a fourth specific effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83(a), in the embodiment, when the AT mode is started, the pseudo set effect is started from the start of the AT mode without going through the opening effect as in the second embodiment.

The pseudo set effect continues for a maximum of 10 games, as in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(b1), similarly to the second embodiment, an effect is produced in which either a fourth specific effect in which characters with the same number are stopped in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 and a non-fourth specific effect in which the characters with the same number are not aligned in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 are stopped using the symbol variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 83(b2), the fourth specific effect is generated before the final game when the number-of-remaining-games image GP becomes 1, and as shown in FIG. 83(b3), a big win effect is performed. As the jackpot effect, for example, a effect is set in which a state in which a friend character's eyes are closed is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the effect continues over a minimum of 4 games and a maximum of 14 games. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(b4), when the appearance of the ally character's eyes widening is displayed as a transition effect in the final game of the big win effect, the pseudo set effect is started again from the next game.

In the pseudo set effect, when the non-fourth specific effect is performed over 10 games, as shown in FIG. 83(b5), after the non-fourth specific effect of the last game, which is the tenth game, as shown in FIG. 83(b6), the non-update effect is performed and the AT mode ends.

<AT effect setting processing>
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this embodiment.

After subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received in step S3602. If a continuation command has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S3603. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, or if the process of step S3603 has been executed, the process advances to step S3604.

In step S3604, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and the game to be started this time is the first game in the AT mode set. If it is the first game of the AT set, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step S3605, and if it is not set, adjustment processing is executed in step S3606, and then this AT effect setting processing is terminated. The adjustment process is a process for adjusting the number of games of the pseudo-set effect and the jackpot effect being executed at the start of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not established, and the details thereof will be described later.

If it is not the first game of the set in step S3604, or if the sub-side continuation flag is set even if it is the first game of the AT set in step S3605, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not an adjusted flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The adjusted flag is a flag that is set when the adjustment processing in step S3606 is performed.

If the adjusted flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3608, and it is determined whether or not the big hit effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The big win effect flag is a flag that is set when starting the big win effect, and is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the big win effect is in progress. If the jackpot effect flag is not set and the virtual set effect is being performed instead of the jackpot effect, the fourth specific effect setting process is executed in step S3609, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Fourth specific effect setting process>
In the fourth specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo AT counter is executed in step S3701, and a process of updating the remaining number of games image GP is executed in step S3702. Then, in step S3703, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, in step S3704, it is determined whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the 10th game of the pseudo set. If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, in steps S3705 to S3708, a process of determining whether or not to generate the fourth specific effect is executed according to the lottery result of this game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. The processes of steps S3701 to S3708 are the same as the processes of steps S3301 to S3308, and the third specific effect table of FIG. 75 can be used as the fourth specific effect table.

In step S3709, it is determined whether or not the fourth specific effect lottery performed in step S3708 is won. When the fourth specific effect lottery is won, or when it is determined in step S3604 that it is the final game of the pseudo set, in step S3710, processing is performed to set the fourth specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display part 65 or the speaker 64 (FIG. 83(b2)). Then, in step S3711, the number-of-big-hit-effect game setting process is executed, and then the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for setting the number of jackpot production games>
In the jackpot effect game number setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 86, in step S3801, a process of acquiring a jackpot game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed. As shown in FIG. 88, the jackpot game number table is set so that one of 4 games to 14 games is selected according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process, and the setting value is set such that the higher the set value of the payout rate, the easier it is to select the short game number jackpot presentation.

After acquiring the number-of-big-hit-games table in step S3801, the number of games for performing the big-hit effect is determined by lottery in step S3802. Then, in step S3803, the lottery result is input to a big win performance counter 1 provided in various counter areas 183b, and after that, in step S3804, a process of setting a big win performance flag is executed, and then this big win performance game number setting processing is finished. By setting the jackpot effect flag, the determination in step S3608 is affirmative from the next game.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, when it is determined that the fourth specific effect lottery is not won in step S3709, the process proceeds to step S3712 to perform the setting process so that the non-fourth specific effect is performed by the auxiliary display part 65 or the speaker 64 (FIG. 83(b1)). Then, in step S3713, the pseudo AT counter is 0, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is the tenth game of the pseudo set, and if it is the tenth game, in step S3714, processing is performed to set the AT end effect to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 (FIG. 83(b6)). If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, when it is determined that the jackpot effect flag is set in step S3608, the process proceeds to step S3610. In step S3610, a process of subtracting 1 from the jackpot effect counter is executed. Then, in step S3611, a process of adding 1 to the jackpot production counter 2 provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The jackpot effect counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in which the jackpot effect is executed. In the subsequent step S3612, it is determined whether or not the big hit effect counter 1 has become zero. If it is not 0, in step S3613, a process for setting the jackpot effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83(b3)), and then this AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big win performance counter 1 becomes 0 in step S3612 and it is the final game of the big win performance, the process proceeds to step S3614 to execute the processing of clearing the big win performance flag, and the processing of clearing the big win performance counter 2 to 0 in step S3615. Then, in step S3616, the process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter is executed, and in step S3617, after performing the process of setting so that the transition effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 (FIG. 83(b4)), this AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for adjustment>
Next, the adjustment processing of step S3606, which is performed in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect counter 1 is greater than 0 and the game is scheduled to perform a jackpot effect. When the jackpot effect counter 1 is 0 and the pseudo set effect is to be performed, in step S3902, a process for setting the fourth specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83(b2)). Then, in step S3903, the big hit effect flag is set, and in step S3904, after executing the process of setting 7 to the big win effect counter 1, this adjustment process ends. The processing of steps S3902 to S3904 corresponds to the processing of steps S3710, S3803 and S3804. That is, by performing the processing of steps S3902 to S3904, the fourth specific effect is generated in the game to be started this time, and the jackpot effect for 7 games is performed from the next game. In this case, the game in which the transition effect is performed after the big win effect is finished is the eighth game in the final set of the AT mode, and the pseudo set effect by the non-fourth specific effect is performed from the ninth game to the eighteenth game (see FIG. 89(a)).

More specifically, from the 2nd game of the final set which is the next game to the 8th game of the final set, the process for setting the big win performance or transition performance is performed by determining that the big win performance flag is set in step S3608 in the AT performance setting processing. In the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step S3715. Then, in step S3715, it is determined whether or not the adjusted flag is set, and since it is not set, the process proceeds to step S3712, and processing for performing the non-fourth specific effect is executed.

If the jackpot effect counter 1 is greater than 0 in step S3901 and the game is scheduled to perform a jackpot effect, it is determined in step S3905 whether or not the jackpot effect counter 2 is 7 or more. When the jackpot performance counter 2 is less than 7 and the number of games of the jackpot performance already executed is 6 or less, 1 is input to the jackpot performance counter 2 at step S3906, and 8 is input to the jackpot performance counter 1 at step S3907. Then, in step S3908, after the process of setting the big win effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 (FIG. 83(b3)), the adjustment process is terminated. In other words, by executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3908, the jackpot effect is executed over eight games from the game started this time. As described above, the case where the processing of steps S3906 to S3908 is executed is the case where the big win effect is scheduled to be performed in the current game and it is six games or less after the start of the big win effect. In this case, the game in which the transition effect is performed after the big win effect is finished is the 8th game in the final set of the AT mode, and the pseudo set effect by the non-fourth specific effect is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game (see FIG. 89(b)).

More specifically, as in the case of performing the processing of step S3904, from the second game of the final set which is the next game to the eighth game of the final set, the processing for setting the big win performance or transition performance is performed by determining that the big win performance flag is set in step S3608 in the AT performance setting processing. In the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and since the adjusted flag is not set in step S3715, the process proceeds to step S3712 to execute the process for performing the non-fourth specific effect.

When the jackpot performance counter 2 is 7 or more in step S3005, the process proceeds to step S3909, and after the currently executed jackpot performance is once ended so that the final set of the pseudo set performance is performed from the 9th game of the final set of the AT mode, processing for determining a game (the number of games of continuous pseudo set performance) in which the fourth specific performance is generated in the pseudo set performance after the big win performance and the number of games of the big win performance after the pseudo set performance is executed.

That is, in step S3909, first, a process of clearing the big hit effect counter 1 and the big hit effect counter 2 to 0 is executed. Then, in step S3910, a process for setting the transition effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83(b4)), and a process for clearing the big hit effect flag is performed in step S3911.

In the subsequent step S3912, a process of acquiring the adjustment game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in a step S3913, an adjustment game number lottery process is executed.

The number-of-games table for adjustment is a table for determining the number of games to be continued for the next big win performance of the currently executed big win performance, and as shown in FIG. 88, the number of games from 4 games to 7 games is set. In step S3913, the number of games from 4 to 7 is randomly determined by lottery or the like.

After executing the processing of step S3913, the processing of inputting the processing result of step S3913 to the adjusted counter 2 provided in the various counter area 183b is executed in step S3914. The adjusted counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games of the jackpot effect next to the jackpot effect currently being executed.

In the subsequent step S3915, a calculation process of the number of games for which the fourth specific effect is generated for adjustment is executed. This process is a process of calculating the game (the number of games in which the pseudo set effect is continued) in which the fourth specific effect is generated in the currently executed pseudo set effect after the big win effect. Specifically, a process of subtracting the adjusted counter 2 from 7 is executed.

Then, in step S3916, the process of inputting the processing result of step S3915 to the adjusted counter 1 provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The adjusted counter 1 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of continuation games of the pseudo set effect next to the jackpot effect currently being executed. After executing the process of step S3916, the process of setting the adjusted flag is executed in step S3917, and then the adjustment process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, if the adjusted flag is set in step S3607 and the adjustment process has been executed before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S3618. In step S3618, it is determined whether adjusted counter 1 is greater than zero. As described above, the adjusted counter 1 corresponds to the number of remaining games of the adjusted pseudo set effect, and when the adjusted counter 1 is greater than 0, it means that the game to be started this time is a game in which the above adjusted pseudo set effect should be performed. In this case, the process advances to step S3609 to execute the fourth specific effect setting process.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step S3715. Then, in step S3715, it is determined whether or not the adjusted flag is set. In this case, since the adjusted flag is set, the process advances to step S3716 to execute the process of subtracting 1 from the adjusted counter 1 . Then, in step S3717, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 1 has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the process proceeds to step S3712 to perform processing for generating the non-fourth specific effect. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3717 that the adjusted counter 1 has become 0, in step S3718, processing for setting the fourth specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display part 65 and the speaker 64 is performed, and then the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated. In this case, since the number of continuous games for the next big win effect has already been set (adjusted counter 2, step S3914), the process of setting the number of continuous games for the next big win effect (step S3711) is not executed.

In the AT performance setting process, when the adjusted flag is set in step S3607 and the adjusted counter 1 is 0 in step S3618, it means that the adjusted pseudo set performance has already been executed, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S3619 to perform the adjusted jackpot performance, and the processing of subtracting 1 from the adjusted counter 2 is executed. Then, in step S3620, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 2 has become 0, and when it is not 0, the process advances to step S3613 to perform processing for setting the big win performance to be performed by the auxiliary display part 65 or the speaker 64, and then the AT performance setting processing is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3620 that the adjusted counter 2 has become 0, the process of clearing the adjusted flag is executed in step S3621, and the process proceeds to step S3616 to input 11 to the pseudo AT counter, and after performing the process of setting so that the transition effect in step S3617 is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the AT effect setting process ends.

In this case, in the first game in the final set of the AT mode, the big win performance is completed and the transition performance is generated, and from the second game, the adjusted pseudo-set performance is performed over the number of games corresponding to the value of the adjusted counter 1.例文帳に追加Then, after the fourth specific effect is generated in the adjusted pseudo-set effect, the adjusted jackpot effect is performed over the number of games corresponding to the value of the adjusted counter 2. - 特許庁Since the adjusted jackpot effect is adjusted to end at the 8th game of the final set, the pseudo set effect in which the non-fourth specific effect is repeatedly generated is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game, and the AT mode ends (see FIG. 89(c)).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the fourth specific effect occurs in the pseudo-set effect, the next pseudo-set is not started immediately, but the next pseudo-set is started via the jackpot effect. Therefore, even if the fourth specific effect occurs early in the pseudo-set and the number of corresponding games is small, the number of games can be compensated for by the game in which the big win effect is performed, and the expectation for the update of the pseudo-set can be purely increased. is.

Since the jackpot performance can be performed over 4 to 14 games, after the fourth specific performance occurs in the pseudo set, the jackpot performance may end in a short number of games and the next pseudo set may be started, or after the big win performance is performed for a long period of time (with a long number of games), the next pseudo set may be started. It is also possible to make the player pay attention to it, and it is possible to enjoy a game with a thrilling feeling.

Here, the pseudo set performance (maximum 10 games) and the continuous jackpot performance (4 games to 14 games) performed during the AT mode are set so that the total number of games of the two performances may be 18 games or more of the AT set or may be less than 18 games. By doing so, even if the number of games of the AT set is not lengthened or shortened on the side of the main controller 101, it is possible to give an impression as if the number of games of the AT set is changed depending on the length of both performances. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability of the AT set with a relatively simple configuration.

In this case, since the pseudo set performance and the jackpot performance are both set so that the number of games is smaller than the number of games of the AT set even if they are continued to the maximum, both performances can strongly give the impression that the set is associated with the AT set, and both performances can help give the impression that the number of games of the AT set changes.

In addition, as in the above configuration, when the fourth specific performance occurs in the pseudo set performance, the transition to the jackpot performance is made, and when the pseudo set performance ends without the fourth specific performance occurring, the AT mode is terminated as it is, so that the non-occurrence of the fourth specific performance in the pseudo set performance and the end of the AT mode are more closely related, and the generation of the fourth specific performance can be more eagerly awaited.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a combination of some or all of them may be applied.

(1) The AT mode is a set management type AT mode, and the number of continuous games in the AT mode differs according to the continuation rate, but a plurality of AT modes with different easiness to continue the AT mode (number of continuous games) may be provided. In this case, for example, a plurality of AT modes with different numbers of initial games may be set, a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities of the end lottery may be set after the AT mode continues until the final lottery is won, a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities of the predetermined end result may be set after the AT mode is terminated when a predetermined end result (e.g., a predetermined bonus result) is won, a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities in addition to the number of games may be set. A plurality of AT modes with different numbers of additional games per hour may be set, or these modes may be combined. Then, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery, the probability of winning the suggesting effect lottery, the number of ending games, the number of games of the jackpot effect, etc. may be changed depending on which AT mode is selected.

(2) The set management type AT mode has 18 games as one set, but the number of games in one set is not limited to this, and may be more or less than 18 games. Alternatively, the number of games in one set may change (there may be more than 18 games), such as by adding more games in one set. Further, for example, in the configuration in which the continuation condition is always satisfied in the first set as in the second embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games to be continued in the first set may be doubled (36 games), or when updating not only the first set but also the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games may be doubled as the number of games in the set. number, etc.) may be set as the number of games in the set.

(3) Although the lottery table used in the lottery processing of each game is common in the AT modes with different continuation rates, the lottery table may be configured differently in each AT mode, or may have different winning probabilities of some or all of the predetermined and specific hands or other results in each AT mode, or may have different occurrence probabilities of specific effects in each AT mode due to the different winning probabilities. In this case, the odds of winning a part or all of a predetermined combination or a specific combination or other results may be different in each AT mode to such an extent that the player cannot identify them (composition where the probabilities are substantially the same).

(4) In the AT add-on process, it is possible to win an add-on win in a specific role, but not to win an add-on win in a normal role. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of winning additional winnings in the normal combination lower than the probability of winning additional winnings in the specific combination. It should be noted that it is not excluded that the probability of additional winning in a part of the normal role (for example, normal reply C) is higher than the probability of winning in a part of the specific role (for example, the chance A), and it is sufficient if the special role as a whole is easier to win in the special role than in the normal role.

(5) The probability of winning the specific performance lottery is set higher for the specific role than for the normal role, but the probability of winning the specific performance lottery for the specific role and the normal role may be set to be the same or substantially the same. Even in this case, it is easier to win the normal role than the specific role in lottery processing of each game, so that the ratio of generating the specific performance triggered by the normal role is higher than the ratio of generating the specific performance triggered by the specific role. In addition, the winning probability of the specific performance lottery may be higher for the normal role than for the specific role, and in this case, the winning probability in the lottery processing of each game between the normal role and the specific role and the winning probability of the specific performance lottery may be adjusted so that the ratio of the occurrence of the specific performance triggered by the normal role is higher than the ratio of the occurrence of the specific performance triggered by the specific role.

(6) The continuation of the AT set in the AT mode is regarded as an advantageous event to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, and the continuation lottery is an example of the advantageous determination, and a specific effect is performed as an effect corresponding to the fact that the conditions for continuing the AT set are not satisfied. It may be an effect associated with winning an additional lottery in the AT mode.

In this case, if a specific effect is to be performed as an effect associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery, then in a configuration in which winning in the AT mode transition lottery and winning the AT mode transition lottery through the precursor mode is performed, the specific effect can occur before the winning effect is performed or before the AT mode is started during the precursor mode, and a plurality of modes with different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery are provided, and the probability of occurrence of the specific effect is different for each mode. It is preferable to use a configuration in which the game is played, or a configuration in which a lottery for execution of a specific effect is performed using the lottery result of each game.

In addition, if a specific performance is performed as a performance associated with winning the execution lottery of the suggestive performance suggesting the set value, a plurality of games may be required from winning the execution lottery of the suggestive performance until the suggestive performance is performed, the specific performance may occur in the game from winning the execution lottery of the suggestive performance until the suggestive performance is performed, and after providing a plurality of modes with different winning probabilities of the execution lottery of the suggestive performance of the set value, the probability of occurrence of the specific performance may be different depending on each mode. , the lottery result of each game may be used to perform a lottery for execution of a specific effect.

If the specific performance is performed as a performance associated with winning the additional lottery in the AT mode, a plurality of games are required from winning the additional lottery until the additional lottery is performed, and the specific performance can occur in the game from winning the additional lottery until the additional lottery is performed. It is good to have a configuration to perform.

In these cases, the decision trigger for the advantageous decision to generate the advantageous event may be set according to each advantageous event, and if the transition to the AT mode is to be the advantageous event, the execution trigger for the AT mode transition lottery may be, for example, the winning of a specific role or the completion of a predetermined number of games as a predetermined decision trigger.

(7) Although the specific effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, it may be configured to be performed by another display section, lamp, or the like, or may be performed by using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, in a game in which a specific effect is not performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate normally, while in a game in which a specific effect is performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated in a manner different from the normal rotation start manner (for example, the period until the start of rotation is made longer or shorter than usual, the rotation is started in order from the left reel 32L, or the reel is rotated at a constant speed. The rotation may be started in such a manner that the rotation is started at a low speed in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is formed, or the rotation is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the rotation is not limited to the start of rotation, and in the game, the rotation mode from the start to the end of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be set to a specific mode different from the normal mode to perform a specific effect.

(8) When the specific effect lottery is won, the specific effect is performed in the game in which the game is won. In this case, in which game the specific effect is to be performed may be determined by lottery or the like, or the specific effect may be performed after a predetermined number of games. However, since the game in which the specific effect is performed needs to be a game in which the specific effect can be executed (during the confrontation effect or the pseudo set of the set), it is preferable to determine the game in which the specific effect is to be executed from the executable games in determining the game to execute the specific effect.

(9) Although it is configured to perform a specific effect lottery to perform a specific effect according to the lottery result of each game, it may be configured to perform a lottery for execution of a specific effect or a lottery for the number of games to be executed, for example, at the start of a confrontation effect or a pseudo set effect. Good.

(10) When the specific performance lottery during the confrontation performance is won, only the game in which the specific performance lottery is won is provided with the specific performance, but the specific performance may be performed after the winning game, or the specific performance may be performed over a plurality of games.

(11) In the set management type AT mode, the continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode, and the continuation rate does not change during the AT mode, but the continuation rate may change even during the AT mode. For example, a continuation rate change lottery may be performed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity such as when each game or set is updated, and when the change lottery is won, the continuation rate thereafter changes (for example, from 10% to 60% continuation rate). When the continuation rate changes, a configuration may be adopted in which not only a mode in which the continuation rate is increased but also a mode in which the continuation rate is lowered may be provided, and a lottery for a high continuation rate and a lottery for a low continuation rate may be drawn separately, or may be drawn at separate drawing timings.

Furthermore, a scenario management type AT mode may be adopted in which a plurality of patterns in which the continuation rate of each set is predetermined, such as a pattern in which the first set continues at 90%, the second set continues at 10%, and the third and subsequent sets continue at 60%, or the first set continues at 10%, the second set continues at 60%, and the third and subsequent sets continue at 90%, and which pattern is determined when shifting to the AT mode.

In these configurations, it is preferable that the continuation rate of the current set affects the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets. For example, if the continuation rate of the next set is determined by lottery or the like when the set is updated, the next continuation rate may be determined by referring to the current continuation rate (for example, if the current rate is 10%, the next time, 90% is more likely to be selected than the 10%, and if the current rate is 60%, the next time, the 60% is more likely to be selected than other continuation rates). In that case, it is better to have a configuration in which the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets can be narrowed down from the continuation rate of the current set. By doing so, the significance of predicting and grasping the continuation rate (of the current set) based on the specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is ensured.

(12) In the configuration in which the continuation rate can change in each set, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition of the current set is generated according to the continuation rate of the current set, it may be configured to generate the specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition of the current set according to the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets.

(13) Even during the opening effect, battle effect, jackpot effect, and ending effect, various specific effects may occur on condition that the AT set continuation condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the specific performance is more likely to occur in the confrontation performance than in the battle performance, or to be more likely to occur in the pseudo-set performance than in the opening performance, the jackpot performance, or the ending performance.

(14) Although the rate of occurrence of the specific effect is varied according to the rate of continuation of the AT mode, the aspect of the specific effect (the color and shape of the character to be displayed, the timing of display, etc.) may be different, or in a structure in which the specific effect can be performed over a plurality of games, the number of games in which the specific effect is executed may vary according to the rate of continuation of the AT mode.

(15) Depending on the rate of continuation of the AT mode, the lottery table used for the lottery process of each game may be changed so that the winning probability of the predetermined result differs. In this case, by setting the predetermined result as a trigger for generating the specific effect, it is possible to change the occurrence rate of the specific effect according to the continuation rate of the AT mode. Further, the number of expected increase in medals (net increase in number) that can be expected per game may differ according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, such as by setting the pressing order bell as a predetermined result. The configuration of varying the number of expected medal increases according to the continuation rate of the AT mode is not limited to the configuration of varying the lottery table. For example, it may be realized by varying the rate of occurrence of notification of the pressing order when winning the pressing order bell. It may be implemented in a configuration in which the winning probability of the prize is different), or may be implemented in another configuration.

(16) In the configuration in which a specific effect is generated when a set additional lottery in an AT set in which a continuation condition is satisfied is not won, the specific effect is not limited to the aspect in which a specific effect is generated when a set additional lottery triggered by a specific role is not won. . In these, it is preferable that the specific effect triggered by the specific role is more likely to occur than the specific effect triggered by the normal role.

(17) A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is performed when winning a set addition in an AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific performance is partially performed when winning the set addition, or the probability of performing the specific performance may differ depending on the lottery result that triggered the set addition.

(18) If an additional lottery is won during an AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied and the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific effect lottery may not be performed in the game. In addition, the specific performance lottery may be generated after the predetermined game without performing the specific performance lottery in the game, or the specific performance may be generated in the next and subsequent games with the predetermined role.

(19) The suggestive effect table is set so that the suggestive effect can be performed in the case of a losing result, but the suggestive effect may be generated even in other normal roles or special roles.

(20) When a specific effect occurs, it may be configured to be in a state in which a suggestive effect can be performed with a predetermined probability, the probability of being in a state in which a suggestive effect can be performed may differ according to a set value, or may differ according to a continuation rate. In addition, in the configuration in which the specific performance can occur multiple times during the confrontation performance, the probability of occurrence of the suggestive performance and the transition rate to the state in which the suggestive performance can be performed may be different depending on the number of occurrences of the specific performance.

(21) In the configuration in which the pseudo-set presentation is performed, when the corresponding specific presentation does not occur during the pseudo-set, the pseudo-set presentation is terminated and the ending presentation is performed until the AT mode is terminated.

(22) Assuming that the ending production is performed after the pseudo set production, for example, the configuration is to update the pseudo set production by generating specific productions in the first game of the AT set where the continuation conditions have not been established, but if the ending production is not performed, the remaining AT set is not established. It is a good idea to create a specific production in a game whose number of games continues (10 games) + 1 (remaining 11 games) with the number of games.

(23) Although the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set effect is set to 10 games, the number may be less than the number of continuous games in the AT set (18), and may be 11 games or more or 9 games or less. Conversely, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect may be equal to or greater than the number of continuous games (18) of the AT set, 18 games, or 19 games or more. Each pseudo set may have a different maximum number of continuous games. In a configuration where each pseudo set has a different maximum number of continuous games, the maximum number of continuous games may be determined by lottery or the like when updating the pseudo set.

Further, the number of both continuous games may be set such that the number of continuous games of the AT set is an integer multiple of the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set performance, and further that the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set performance is an integer multiple of the maximum number of continuous games of the AT set. For example, if the number of continuous games of the AT set is 18 games, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect may be 9 games or 6 games, or the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect may be 36 games or 54 games.

(24) In the first game of the AT set in which the condition for continuation is not satisfied and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 18 games, the specific effect is forcibly performed in the pseudo set effect. For example, in a configuration in which success or failure of the continuation condition of the next AT set is determined at the end of the AT set (final game), if the continuation condition of the next AT set is not satisfied in the final game of the AT set, a specific performance may be generated in the game to update the pseudo set. By forcibly generating a specific effect in a game in which at least the number of remaining AT mode games is equal to or less than twice the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set (20 games) and equal to or greater than the maximum number of continuous games plus 1 (11 games), the pseudo set next to the pseudo set terminated by the specific effect can be executed over the maximum number of continuous games. It is possible to configure such that the set cannot be played over the maximum number of continuous games. In the case where the specific effect is forcibly performed according to the number of remaining games in the AT mode as described above, it is possible to effectively camouflage the specific effect by making the specific effect more likely to occur in the game in which the specific effect can be forcibly performed (for example, the final game of the pseudo set as described above).

(25) A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is forcibly generated during the pseudo set effect in relation to the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section. For example, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number until reaching 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games, a specific performance is forcibly generated during the pseudo set performance, so that even when the AT mode is terminated under forced termination conditions in an advantageous section, the end game can be matched well with the end game of the pseudo set performance. It should be noted that the predetermined number is preferably the number of games equal to or greater than the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set effect plus 1, and more preferably the number of games is equal to or less than twice the maximum number of continuous games. In addition, in the configuration in which the ending effect is performed before reaching the upper limit number of games of 1500 games, the specific effect may be forcibly generated when the number of games up to the number of games (1450 games) excluding the number of games for which the ending effect is performed (for example 50 games) reaches the above-mentioned predetermined number.

(26) After the specific effect is performed during the confrontation effect, the effect suggesting the value of the AT set counter on the main control device 101 side (remaining AT set number) is performed, or the suggesting effect may be performed more easily than before the specific effect is executed.

(27) When the continuation condition is established during the battle production, the battle production table is rewritten. However, a revival victory production may be provided to notify that the continuation condition is satisfied by the ally character reviving and winning after the battle production, and when the continuation condition is established during the battle production, the production is performed with the battle production table as the ally defeat production, and the revival victory production is performed after the ally defeat production.

(28) The confrontation effect is 10 games and the battle effect is 8 games, and the number of games in which the confrontation effect is performed is larger than the number of games in which the battle effect is performed in one AT set.

(29) Although the battle effect is performed even if the specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, the battle effect may not be performed when the specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, and the jackpot effect (Fig. 64(b)) may be performed until the end game of the AT set.

(30) Although the confrontation effect and the battle effect are continuously performed, the confrontation effect and the battle effect may be interposed by a game in which a predetermined effect such as the above-described jackpot effect is interposed.

(31) The expected increase in number of medals per game during the AT mode is not limited to the above, and may be larger or smaller. For example, a JAC may be provided as a kind of bonus that increases the probability of winning such as a push-order bell over a predetermined number of games, and if the JAC winning can be established when winning the JAC, the expected increasing number of medals per game will increase over the predetermined number of games, and if the JAC winning cannot be established when the JAC is won, the expected increased number of medals will not change. For example, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order when the JAC is won, the JAC prize is not established, and if it is in a specific order different from the predetermined order, the JAC prize is established, so that it is possible to change the number of expected increase in medals during the AT mode depending on whether or not to execute notification of the pressing order of the specific order.

(32) Although the continuation rate of the AT set is suggested by the occurrence rate of the specific effect, etc., it may be separately configured to perform an effect that suggests the continuation rate. For example, a plurality of background colors may be provided in the auxiliary display section 65 during the AT mode, and blue, for example, is likely to be selected as the background color in the 10% continuous AT mode, while red, for example, may be easily selected as the background color in the 90% continuous AT mode.

(33) In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, the lottery for the advantageous zone transition is set to be won regardless of the lottery result, but the winning probability is not limited to the above.

(34) Various effects during the AT mode (confrontation effect, normal effect, specific effect, battle effect, pattern variation effect, second specific effect, non-second specific effect, standby effect, opening effect, pseudo-set effect, third specific effect, non-third specific effect, ending effect, renewal effect, non-renewal effect, revival effect, jackpot effect, transition effect, etc.) are examples, and needless to say, the effect is not limited to the above.

(35) The push order notification is configured to be performed by both the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side and the auxiliary display section 65 on the display control device 81 side.

(36) The instruction monitor 68 is configured to be able to notify each of the six types of operation order, but for example, in the case of normal replies A to C, in the order of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, only the stop switches 42 to 44 that should be operated first are associated with it, and it may be configured to include a push order notification mode that notifies only the stop switches 42 to 44 that are to be operated first.

(37) Although the advantageous section ends when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section may not end when the AT mode ends. For example, the advantageous interval may not end depending on the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval at the end of the AT mode. Specifically, if the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval at the end of the AT mode multiplied by the expected increase in the number of games per AT mode is less than or equal to the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous interval, or is less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous interval may not end. If the number of increments is equal to or less than the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets) or less than the upper limit increment number, the advantageous section may not be ended.

(38) Although the lighting control of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is performed during the transition to the advantageous section, the lighting control of the eighth display segment N8 may not be performed even during the transition to the advantageous section, and the lighting control may be performed when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. The predetermined lighting condition may be established, for example, when a shift to the AT mode is confirmed, or when a situation arises in which notification of the pressing order may occur.

(39) A configuration may be adopted in which the press order notification is executed at least once during the CZ mode. In addition, the AT mode may be configured such that the push order notification is executed at least once, and even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode or the CZ mode becomes 0, the AT mode or the CZ mode may not end until the push order notification is executed once.

(40) Although the first BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game and the second BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used.

(41) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. However, the 2-bet game may be configured so that a plurality of types of BBs can be won. For example, in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB and the 2nd BB can be won. In this case, the configuration may be such that the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning can be realized in the 2-bet game, the 3-bet game neither the 1st BB nor the 2nd BB is won, and the 3-bet game neither the 1st BB winning nor the 2nd BB winning is established. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(42) The same lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, and the same game base is used.

(43) A 3-bet game is played in both the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, but the number of bets may differ depending on the type of BB state, for example, a 3-bet game is played in the 1st BB state and a 2-bet game is played in the 2nd BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with the number of bets different from the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with the specified specified number of bets.

(44) In both the first BB state game and the second BB state game, the execution of instruction functions such as the process for notifying the pressing order and the specific process is restricted. However, the presence or absence of restrictions may differ depending on the type of BB state. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and processing related to each instruction function may be restricted or not restricted in any or all of them.

(45) Although the 3-bet game cannot achieve the 2nd BB winning and the 2-bet game cannot achieve the 1st BB winning, the configuration may be such that the 3-bet game is less likely to win the 2nd BB than the 2-bet game, and the 2-bet game is less likely to win the 1st BB than the 3-bet game.

(46) Although the 3-bet game does not win the 2nd BB and the 2-bet game does not win the 1st BB, the 3-bet game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the 2nd BB than the 2-bet game, and the 2-bet game may have a configuration in which the 1st BB is less likely to be won than in the 3-bet game.

(47) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, if the operation unit is operated once, the bet is 1, if it is operated twice, the bet is 2, and if it is operated 3 times, the bet is 3. Furthermore, even if the desired number of bets is exceeded, such as 1 bet when operated 4 times and 2 bets when operated 5 times, it is possible to set the desired number of bets by re-operating.

(48) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the CZ mode is uniformly set to 10 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, although the upper limit of the number of games in the preparation mode is uniformly set to 40 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(49) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1BB state and the 2BB state is about plus 0.00, and the medals neither increase nor decrease in the 1BB state or the 2BB state. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(50) When the player plays the internal state or the non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or wins the first BB or the second BB, the execution of each process related to the instruction function is changed from the state in which the execution is permitted to the state in which the execution is restricted.

(51) The configuration is such that the ball payout rate changes depending on each setting value, and setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 may increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls in a long period of time, setting 2, 3 and 4 may require a longer time to increase the predetermined amount than the setting 1 and 5 and require a shorter time to decrease the predetermined amount than the setting 1 and 5, and a setting 6 may be configured such that the number of paid balls hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(52) Although the slot machine provided with three reels and corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine provided with five reels and corresponding stop switches in parallel may be employed. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(53) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) provided with a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game values in the game hall, so that problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls as game values seen in the current game halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist can be solved.

(54) In the above embodiment, the game can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. In such a medal-less type gaming machine, for example, a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) can be used to set the number of bets in a game to start the game, and a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals can be provided as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantage determination means (function for executing continuation determination processing and AT addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity;
when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, advantageous execution means for causing the advantageous event at a predetermined specific timing (processing for starting a new set of AT mode processing by main controller 101, for example, a function of executing steps S1404 to S1406);
Execution determination means (a function of executing a specific effect lottery process by a display control device 81) for determining whether to execute a specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in a specific game executed in a situation before the specific timing when the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is the advantageous result;
When the determination result by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to executing the specific notification, a specific notification means for executing the specific notification (a function of executing a specific effect setting process by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be granted. The game is diversified with the addition of sex.

In such playability, depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous event, the player's interest may be focused on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game and the awarding of the privilege based on the lottery result, and it is undeniable that the gameability of the slot machine in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and the awarding of the privilege may be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until an advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for an advantageous event, and the player's interest is likely to decrease.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a game as a specific game in a situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes the advantageous event becomes an advantageous result and before the advantageous event occurs, the execution determination of the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result is performed according to the lottery result of the game. Therefore, by utilizing the psychology of the player who wants to know that the advantageous result has been obtained before the advantageous event occurs, the degree of attention to the lottery result of the specific game is preferably increased.

In addition, with the above configuration, in a game in which there is a time lag until an advantageous event occurs after the result of an advantageous judgment executed based on a predetermined judging opportunity becomes an advantageous result, a specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event according to the lottery result of each game is performed, so that the specific notification is not performed as a result of the advantageous determination based on the predetermined determination result, but as if the advantageous determination is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and as a result, an impression is given that the specific notification is performed. is also possible. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the specific game until an advantageous event occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature A2. A first state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) with different probabilities that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result are set,
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the probability that the determination result of the execution determination in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state is the corresponding result is different from the probability that the determination result of the execution determination is the corresponding result in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state.

According to the above configuration, in the first state and the second state in which the probability that the result of the advantageous determination becomes an advantageous result is different, the probability of winning the execution of the specific notification in the specific game is different even if the lottery result is obtained by the same lottery means. By doing so, not only the game property of grasping the result of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification but also the game property of grasping the judgment state (first state or second state) of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification is added, and the degree of attention to the lottery result in the specific game can be preferably increased by increasing the degree of attention to the specific notification.

Feature A3. The second state has a higher probability that the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means will be the advantageous result than the first state,
The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the probability that the determination result of the execution determination in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state is the corresponding result is higher than the probability that the determination result of the execution determination is the corresponding result in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state.

According to the above configuration, the determination state (second state) that is likely to result in an advantageous result makes it easier to execute the specific notification in the specific game. That is, in a judgment state in which an advantageous result is likely to occur, the specific notification is more likely to be executed after the advantageous result is obtained and before the advantageous event occurs. In other words, in a judgment state in which it is difficult to obtain an advantageous result, many games in which the specific notification is not performed from the time when an advantageous result is obtained to the time when an advantageous event occurs may be completed. By doing so, in the configuration for improving the attention degree of each game by using the player's psychology expecting execution of the specific notification, the number of games expected to have the effect of improving the attention degree increases as the advantageous event is less likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention of each game while avoiding an increase in the payout rate due to an excessive increase in the rate of occurrence of advantageous events.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which the determination state of the previous advantageous determination is taken over even after an advantageous event occurs and the advantageous determination is made, or in a configuration in which the previous determination state affects the subsequent determination state, it is thought that the player will have a high interest in grasping the determination state of the advantageous determination by the specific notification even after the advantageous result is obtained, and a game of predicting the determination state of the advantageous determination from the timing of the occurrence of the specific notification is added to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. The result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means executed in the first state is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event has occurred by the advantageous execution means, the advantageous judgment is made by the advantageous judgment means in the first state, or the advantageous judgment is more likely to be made by the advantageous judgment means in the first state than in the second state, and the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means executed in the second state is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event has occurred by the advantageous execution means, the second state. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that an advantageous determination is made by the advantageous determination means in , or the advantageous determination is more likely to be made by the advantageous determination means in the second state than in the first state.

According to the above configuration, after an advantageous event occurs with an advantageous result in the advantageous decision, the advantageous decision is made by taking over the decision state of the previous advantageous decision, or the decision state of the previous advantageous decision is taken over and the advantageous decision is easily made.

Feature A5. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability that is lower than the first probability,
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the correspondence result is obtained with a third probability in the case of the first identification result, and the execution determination is performed so that the correspondence result is obtained with a fourth probability higher than the third probability in the case of the second identification result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the product of the first probability and the third probability (5.5% if the continuation rate is 10%, 13.3% if the continuation rate is 90%) is set to be greater than the product of the second probability and the fourth probability (0.8% if the continuation rate is 10%, 1.0% if the continuation rate is 90%, FIG. 51).

According to the above configuration, there is a first specific result and a second specific result that is less likely to be won, and in a configuration in which it is easier to win the specific notification execution determination triggered by the second specific result than the specific notification execution decision triggered by the first specific result, the product of the winning probability (first probability) of the first specific result and the winning probability (third probability) of the specific notification execution decision triggered by the first specific result is the winning probability (second probability) of the second specific result and the second specific result. Since it is set so as to be larger than the product of the winning probability (fourth probability) of the execution determination of the specific notification as an opportunity, the specific notification triggered by the first specific result is substantially easier to generate the specific notification triggered by the second specific result. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the second specified result is not easily won and the chance of executing the specified report is practically scarce, although the specified report is likely to be executed with the second specified result as a so-called rare combination. Therefore, it is possible to expect the performance of the specific notification even in the case of the first specific result that is relatively easy to win as the lottery result of the game, and it is possible to provide a configuration that favorably exhibits the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification.

Feature A6. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The first probability is a probability of 1/1 of the first specific number (1.04);
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the first specific number is set to be smaller than the special number.

According to the above configuration, since each probability is set so that the specific game with the first specific result occurs at least once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is made), it is possible to suitably secure the opportunity to execute the specific notification.

Feature A7. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The second probability is a probability of 1/second specific number (28.4),
The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, wherein the second specific number is set to be larger than the special number.

According to the above configuration, each probability is set so as to increase the possibility that the specific game with the second specific result will not occur even once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is made). Therefore, the significance of setting the specific notification triggered by the first specific result to be easily executed is enhanced.

Feature A8. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The first probability is a probability of 1/1 of the first specific number (1.04);
The product of the first probability and the third probability is 1/3rd specific number (about 1/18.2 if the continuation rate is 10%, 1/7.52 if the continuation rate is 90%), and the product of the second probability and the fourth probability is 1/4th specific number (about 1/122 if the continuation rate is 10%, and about 1/105 if the continuation rate is 90%).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, wherein the third specific number can be a value smaller than the special number, while the fourth specific number is set so as not to be a value smaller than the special number.

According to the above configuration, during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is made), the specific notification triggered by the first specific result can be generated at least once, while the specific notification triggered by the second specific result is unlikely to occur even once. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the prepared specific notification is not executed and to increase the expectation for the first specific result that is relatively easy to win as a lottery result of the game.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, further comprising limiting means for limiting execution of the specific notification until at least the advantageous event occurs after the specific notification is made by the specific notification means (a function of executing processing for setting an occurrence completion flag by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, after the execution of the specific notification, the execution of the specific notification is restricted until an advantageous event occurs, so that the psychology of the player who wants not to miss the specific notification can be used to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game performance.

Feature A10. As the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, a specific effect in VS display) and a second specific notification in which the notification mode is different to the extent that the player can distinguish from the first specific notification (for example, a specific effect in ally character up) is set,
The specific notification means executes the first specific notification when executing the specific notification in the first specific game (first game of the set) among the specific games, and executes the second specific notification when executing the specific notification in the second specific game (second to fourth games of the set) different from the first specific game among the specific games.

According to the above configuration, once the specific notification is executed, the subsequent execution of the specific notification is restricted, and since the notification mode of the specific notification that can be executed in each game is set differently, the execution of the specific notification is more likely to be missed unless the occurrence of the specific notification is carefully checked. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game presentation through the expectation of the specific notification.

Feature A11. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a result different from the advantageous result, and in the specific game before the specific timing, the advantageous event is generated based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
The advantageous execution means is configured to cause the advantageous event at the specific timing when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the execution determination means determines execution of the specific notification when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result even in a specific game executed in a situation where the result of the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is the advantageous result and before the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means does not become an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means becomes an advantageous result before the specific timing, an advantageous event occurs at the specific timing. Then, even when the result of the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result, the specific notification can be executed when the specific result is obtained in the specific game before the specific timing. In this case, since the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means is made based on the lottery result by the lottery means, in the constitution in which the fact that the result of the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means is the advantageous result is notified as the specific notification according to the lottery result of each game, the specific notification that an advantageous event actually occurs according to the lottery result of each game is also made. By doing so, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the advantageous result is obtained according to the lottery result of each game and the specific notification is executed in the situation where the advantageous result is obtained in advance by the advantage determination means.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "second advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in feature A1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature A12. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability that is lower than the first probability,
The second advantageous determination means makes an advantageous determination when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second specified result, but does not make the advantageous determination when the first specified result is the first specified result.
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the specific notification means is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the first specific result is higher than the ratio of executing the specific notification when the result is the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, in the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means, it is assumed that the second specified result, which is less likely to win than the first specified result, is more likely to result in an advantageous result, and the specific notification is configured to occur more easily in the case of the second specified result triggered by the first specified result than in the case of the second specified result. It is possible to strongly give the impression that an advantageous event may occur. Therefore, while avoiding an increase in the ball-out rate, in the specific game, even the first specific result that is likely to be won as a lottery result can be increased in attention, and the interest in the specific game can be improved until an advantageous event occurs.

Feature A13. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability that is lower than the first probability,
The execution determination means is means capable of performing the execution determination so that when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means becomes the advantageous result triggered by the second specified result, the execution determination is made so that the corresponding result is obtained in the specific game that becomes the first specified result (In the display control device 81, in a game in which an additional win with a specific role is received and a continuation command is received, if the specific effect lottery is not won, the specific effect is not executed in the game. A gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, characterized by comprising a function of executing a specific effect setting process set as follows.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means triggered by the second specified result that is relatively difficult to win is an advantageous result, the specific notification may be executed not in the specific game that has the second specified result but in the specific game that has the first specified result, and while the probability that the result of the advantageous determination triggered by the first specified result will be an advantageous result is not excessively increased, it is possible to artificially increase the expectation that the result of the advantageous determination will be an advantageous result even if it is the first specified result. .

Feature A14. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability that is lower than the first probability,
The execution determination means is capable of performing the execution determination so that when the result of the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means becomes the advantageous result triggered by the second specified result, the execution determination is performed so that the corresponding result is obtained in the specific game that has the second specified result (in the display control device 81, in the game in which the continuation command is received by winning the additional win with the specific role, if the specific effect lottery is won, the specific effect setting process is executed in the game). The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to A13.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means triggered by the second specific result that is relatively difficult to win becomes an advantageous result, the specific information may be executed in the specific game with the second specific result. In this way, when the second specified result as a so-called rare combination is won in the specified game, the occurrence of an advantageous event triggered by the second specified result is notified by the specified notification, so that the impression that the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is actually executed in the specified game can be strongly given, thereby enhancing the effect of making the player think that the advantageous event is occurring as a result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means executed in the specified game rather than the result of the advantageous determination performed based on the predetermined determination opportunity.

Feature A15. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and in the specific game before the specific timing, a third advantageous determination means (a function of executing AT addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing the advantageous event based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
The advantageous execution means is capable of causing the advantageous event based on the judgment result by the third advantageous judgment means after the advantageous event based on the judgment result by the advantageous judgment means occurs, when the result of the advantageous judgment by the third advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the execution determination means is capable of performing the execution determination so that the corresponding result in the specific game in which the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means differs from the advantageous result (a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect based on a non-winning command by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determining means is an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determining means becomes an advantageous result before the specific timing, an advantageous event will occur based on the determined result of the advantageous determining means at the specific timing, and after that, an advantageous event will occur based on the determined result of the third advantageous determining means. In the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result, and when the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is not an advantageous result, the specific notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the specific information is executed as an advantageous result according to the lottery result of the specific game without excessively increasing the winning probability of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means in the specific game.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "third advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in feature A1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the advantage determination means makes the advantage determination regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game in which the predetermined determination opportunity has occurred.

According to the above configuration, in order to give the impression that an advantageous event occurs based on the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means as if the advantageous event had occurred as a result of the subsequent specific game, it is possible to give the impression that the advantageous event is strongly associated with the lottery result of the lottery means in the subsequent specific game rather than the game in which the advantageous judgment was made by the advantageous judgment means, and it is possible to easily give the impression that the advantageous event has occurred as a result of the specific game.

Feature A17. As the specific game, a first specific game (e.g., a game in which a confrontation effect is performed) in which the specific notification can be performed, and a second specific game (e.g., a game in which a battle effect is performed) in which the specific notification is not performed or the specific notification is less likely to be performed than the first specific game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the second specific game is executed after the first specific game, and then the specific timing occurs.

According to the above configuration, after the advantageous determination is made, the second specific game is executed in which the specific notification is not performed or is difficult to be performed through the first specific game in which the specific notification can be performed, and then an advantageous event can occur. By doing so, the timing at which the specific notification is performed becomes limited, and the rarity of the specific notification is increased, thereby making it possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. In addition, since the second specific game in which the specific information cannot occur is interposed between the first specific game in which the specific information can occur and the advantageous event, for example, when the presence or absence of the occurrence of the advantageous event in the second specific game is notified by a performance different from the specific information, it is possible to suitably solve the problem that attention is dispersed due to the mixture of the specific information and the specific information.

Feature A18. In the second specific game, after execution of a predetermined notification (for example, an ally attack effect or an enemy attack effect), the result of the advantageous determination by the advantage determination means is the advantageous result (ally victory effect) corresponding to the advantageous result or the non-advantageous content (enemy victory effect) corresponding to the result different from the advantageous result. 7. The gaming machine according to 7.

According to the above configuration, after the execution of the predetermined notification, in the configuration in which the correspondence notification in which either the content notification including the advantageous content or the non-advantageous content is performed is performed in the second specific game and the result of the advantageous determination is notified, the specific notification is not performed in the second specific game. When the specific notification is performed in , only the player who grasps the generation of the specific notification grasps that the corresponding notification in the second specific game has advantageous contents, so that the corresponding notification can be enjoyed while being immersed in a sense of superiority, and the amusement of the game can be favorably improved.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A18 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707.). It is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be individually applied to each configuration of the features A1 to A18, and a part of each technical idea can be applied. Or it is also possible to combine and apply all. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is transitioned after the unit state is executed, and when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied and before the game in which the unit state ends, execution determination means (a function of executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of specific notification corresponding to the continuation condition being satisfied;
When the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, a specific notification means for executing the specific notification (a function of executing a process for performing a specific effect by the display control device 81);
with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state are set,
The game machine is characterized in that the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be more likely to be executed in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be granted. In this case, an advantageous state for the player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied.

In a unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, there is a case where the specific notification is performed as an advance notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition before the unit state is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to use the psychology of the player who wants to confirm that the continuation condition is satisfied and to feel relieved, to arouse expectations for the specific notification and appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Moreover, as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which the continuation condition is more likely to be established are set, and the specific notification as the advance notice is set so that the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state. Therefore, the generation of the specific notification does not simply indicate the satisfaction of the continuation condition in the unit state, but indicates the continuation rate of the unit state depending on the timing of occurrence. In other words, when the specific notification occurs, it not only suggests that the unit state will continue, but also that the unit state has a high continuation rate, and it is possible to further increase the expectation for the specific notification.

In addition, the number of games from the start of the unit state to the generation of the specific notification is reduced as the continuation rate is higher, and is increased as the continuation rate is lower, by adopting a configuration such that the higher the continuation rate, the more likely the specific notification is generated.

Here, assuming that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, it is considered that the more the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification in one unit state, that is, the more the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification, the more the player can fully enjoy the excitement of the unit state. In this regard, since the number of games until the occurrence of the specific notification increases as the continuation rate is low as described above, even in an advantageous state with a low continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the excitement of whether or not the specific notification is generated. Conversely, the higher the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification in one unit state, but the greater the number of repetitions of the unit state, the smaller the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification in the one unit state can be compensated. As a result, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the occurrence of the specific notification is expected.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the execution determination means determines execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, execution determination of specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game, so not only is it expected that the specific notification will be performed, but also the lottery result of each game can be noticed. In particular, by performing the specific notification according to the lottery result of each game, it is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to preferably increase the attention of each game.

Feature B3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means will be the corresponding result is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the specified result is set to the same probability or substantially the same probability in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result with the same winning probability regardless of the type of advantageous state, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination will be the execution result is set higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. As a result, the occurrence rate of the specific notification is higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. By doing so, even if the winning probability of the lottery result of each game is not changed according to each advantageous state, it is possible to expect the excellent effect of the feature B1 only by changing the winning probability of the execution lottery of the specific information.

Feature B4. updating means for updating the unit state (function for executing AT mode processing by the main controller 101);
satisfaction determination means (function for executing continuation determination processing by the main controller 101) for determining whether the continuation condition is satisfied when the unit state is updated by the update means;
with
a probability that the establishment determination result by the establishment determination means is a result of establishment corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state;
a first control device (main control device 101) comprising at least the updating means and the establishment determination means; a second control device (display control device 81) which is a control device different from the first control device and comprises the execution determination means and the specific notification means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, when the unit state is updated, it is determined whether the continuation condition is met or not, and the continuation rate depends on the probability of determining that the continuation condition is met. Then, the first control device updates the unit state and determines whether the continuation condition is satisfied, and the second control device determines whether to execute the specific notification or executes the specific notification. By distributing the functions, it is possible to prevent a local increase in the processing load.

The "update means" may be limited to "update means for updating the unit state so as to shift to the next unit state when the unit state ends while the continuation condition is satisfied".

Further, the ``satisfaction determination means'' may be limited to ``satisfaction determination means for determining whether the continuation condition is satisfied when the updating means terminates the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, or when a new unit state is started after being updated by the updating means''.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the success determination means is configured to perform the success determination regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game for which the success determination is performed.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the lottery result of the game, the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined based on the continuation rate set according to the type of advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to make the processing configuration extremely simple in determining the success or failure of the continuation condition, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the event that the unit state continues as the design value is exceeded by the lottery result of the game.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the success determination means determines success with a first probability in the first advantageous state and determines success with a second probability in the second advantageous state, regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game for which the success determination is made."

Feature B6. a second establishment determination means (a function of executing AT addition processing by the main control device 101) for executing a second establishment judgment to satisfy the continuation condition in the unit state based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied;
The gaming machine according to feature B4 or feature B5, wherein the second success determination means is configured to perform the second success determination with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, even if the determination result of the continuation determination performed when the unit state is updated indicates that the continuation condition is not established, the second satisfaction determination for establishing the continuation condition is performed according to the lottery result of the game in the unit state after the update. Moreover, since the second establishment determination is made according to the lottery result of each game without depending on the continuation rate of the advantageous state, the decline in interest in the game can be suitably suppressed without giving up, for example, even if the continuation rate is low and the advantageous state.

It should be noted that the description that ``the second determination is made with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state'' means ``when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, if the first advantageous state, the second determination is made so that the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition with the first probability, and if the second advantageous state, the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result is achieved with the first probability, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. If the second result is different from the second result, if the first advantageous state, the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result is achieved with a second probability different from the first probability, and if the second advantageous state, the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result is achieved with the second probability. It is not excluded that

Feature B7. The execution determination means determines execution of the specific notification according to the lottery result of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined first specific result (loss result), the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the corresponding result is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. a probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determining means is the corresponding result is set to be higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the lottery means is set so that the probability of the lottery result being the first specified result is higher than the probability of being the second specified result.

According to the above configuration, execution determination of specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game, so not only is it expected that the specific notification will be performed, but also the lottery result of each game can be noticed. In particular, by performing the specific notification according to the lottery result of each game, it is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to preferably increase the attention of each game.

Moreover, if the lottery result of the game is the first specified result, it is easier to execute the specific notification in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and in the case of the second specified result, it is easier to execute the specific notification in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. It is possible to achieve this even though the occurrence rate of the specific notification differs depending on the situation. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the lottery result of the game and the occurrence rate of the specific notification in the game property of predicting the high or low of the continuation rate from the occurrence rate of the specific notification and the game property of varying the number of games that provide a thrilling feeling until the occurrence of the specific notification according to the high or low continuation rate, and to improve the game performance favorably.

Feature B8. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and setting means for setting one of the plurality of set values (a function of executing a winning probability setting process by the main controller 101);
Special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a function of executing a suggestive effect setting process or a lottery process for the number of ending games by the display control device 81);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the execution probability or execution mode of the special notification by the special notification means differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since the execution probability and the execution mode of the special notification as the suggestive effect of the set value differ according to the continuation rate of the advantageous state, it is possible to add not only the game property that expects a high continuation rate so that one advantageous state will continue for a long time, but also the game property that expects the advantageous state to have a continuation rate that makes it easy to determine and predict the set value by the special notification.

In this case, the level of the continuation rate can be predicted and determined based on the occurrence rate of the specific notification, but when the special notification occurs, the setting value is narrowed down based on the relationship with the continuation rate predicted and determined by the specific notification.

It should be noted that the "special notification means" can also be expressed as follows.

"Special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to special information (set value, AT set counter information) beneficial to the player (for example, a suggestive effect setting process by the display control device 81, a lottery process for the number of ending games, and a function of executing a process for performing an AT set counter suggestive effect)".

Feature B9. When the first setting values (settings 1 and 2) are set by the setting means, the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the first mode (long ending game number) in the first advantageous state, while the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the second mode (short ending game number) in the second advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein when second set values (settings 5 and 6) different from the first set value are set by the setting means, the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be performed in the second mode in the first advantageous state, while the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be performed in the first mode in the second advantageous state.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature B8, and by adopting a configuration that allows narrowing down of setting values according to the aspect of special notification and the continuation rate (type of advantageous state) as in the above configuration, it is possible to synergistically increase the degree of attention to the specific notification.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9, wherein the special notification means is configured to be capable of executing the special notification when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means.

As in the above configuration, by executing specific notifications with different occurrence probabilities according to the continuation rate, by making it possible to execute special notifications as setting suggestions, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notifications as a preliminary stage by utilizing the psychology of the player who wants to grasp the set value.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B10, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, or executes the special notification when the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied ends.

According to the above configuration, the situation of confirming the specific notification, which is confirmed while expecting that the advantageous state will continue for a long time, and the special notification as a setting suggestion performed when the advantageous state ends are clearly distinguished, and it is possible to avoid the phenomenon of overlooking the notification due to trying to confirm both notifications, and to preferably avoid the increase in the processing load for trying to generate both notifications in the same situation. Then, for example, even if the advantageous state ends with a small number of updates of the unit state, it is possible to narrow down the setting value by grasping whether the termination is due to the low continuation rate (first advantageous state) in the first place, or the fact that the continuation condition was not satisfied by chance despite the high continuation rate (second advantageous state), by the time the special notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the significance of predicting and grasping the continuation rate based on the specific notification, and even when the advantageous state ends, if the continuation rate is grasped by then, the motivation to predict the set value can be increased, and it is possible to change the mind when the advantageous state ends.

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, further comprising: means for restricting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means after the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means in one of the unit states (a function of executing a process of setting an occurrence completion flag by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, in one unit state, after the specific notification as the advance notification is executed, the execution of the specific notification again is restricted. That is, in a configuration in which the higher the continuation rate of the unit state is, the more likely the specific notification is to occur, the higher the continuation rate is, the more games are played until the update of the unit state after the specific notification is performed. In other words, the lower the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games played until the update of the unit state after the specific notification is performed, and the relatively larger number of games played until the specific notification is performed.

Here, assuming that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, it is considered that the more the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification in one unit state, that is, the more the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification, the more the player can fully enjoy the excitement of the unit state. In this regard, the lower the continuation rate is, the more games are played until the specific notification occurs, so even in an advantageous state with a low continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the excitement of whether or not the specific notification will occur. Conversely, the higher the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification in one unit state, but the greater the number of repetitions of the unit state, the smaller the number of games played until the occurrence of the specific notification in the one unit state can be compensated. As a result, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the occurrence of the specific notification is expected.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B12 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707.). It is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be applied individually to each configuration of the features B1 to B12, and part of each technical idea. Or it is also possible to combine and apply all. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, a predetermined number of games (18 games) or more are played as one unit state, and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is entered after the unit state is executed, and when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (for example, a specific combination such as Cherry A), establishment determination is made to establish the continuation condition, while if the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result different from the first result (for example, a normal combination such as a bell in order of pushing), the establishment determination is not performed, or the establishment determination is performed so that the continuation condition is less likely to be established than in the case of the first result. function to execute AT addition processing by),
In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, specific notification means capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition before the end of the unit state (a function of executing processing for performing a specific effect by the display control device 81);
with
The game machine is characterized in that the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be performed in the game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result than in the game in which the lottery result is the first result.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be granted. In this case, an advantageous state for the player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied. Moreover, in a unit state in which the continuation condition is not established, when the lottery result of the game is the first result, determination of whether the continuation condition is more likely to be established in the unit state than in the case of the second result can be performed, and the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game in the unit state is preferably increased.

However, for example, given the specific number of games in the unit state and the winning probability of the first result, it may be rare for the first result to be won in one unit state, and in such a configuration, the player may not have much expectation for the success determination that has been prepared. On the other hand, if the specific number is increased, the winning probability of the first result is too high, or the winning probability of the success judgment is too high, the ball payout rate may increase.

Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the specific notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can be generated before the end of the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, and the specific notification is set so that it is more likely to occur in the game with the second result than in the first result. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the expectation for the establishment determination without increasing the specific number.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, further comprising means for restricting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is a result of establishment corresponding to establishment of the continuation condition (a function of executing processing for not performing a specific effect if a specific effect lottery is not won even in a game in which a continuation command is received by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game with the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the specific notification in the game that is the first result, even though the result of the establishment determination is more likely to be the establishment result in the case of the first result than in the case of the second result. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to the game, which is the second result.

The above configuration does not negate execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means in the game in which the result of establishment determination by the establishment determination means satisfies the continuation condition. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific notification is not completely executed in the game that results in establishment, in which case the effects described above can be expected more clearly.

Feature C3. In a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, a second establishment determination means (a function of executing AT addition processing by the main controller 101) that determines whether the continuation condition of the unit state after the next time of the unit state is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the specific notification means includes non-establishment means (a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect based on reception of a non-winning command by the display control device 81) for executing the specific notification in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means does not result in establishment corresponding to establishment of the continuation condition.

According to the above configuration, when the result of establishment determination as a so-called additional judgment to satisfy the continuation condition from the next time onwards is not satisfied, and the additional judgment is not won, the specific notification can be executed in the game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the specific notification while preventing the continuation rate of the unit state from becoming too high, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the specific notification in each game.

Feature C4. The second establishment determination means performs the establishment determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, and does not perform the establishment determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result, or executes the establishment determination so that the continuation condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the case of the first result.
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the non-establishment means executes the specific notification in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means based on the first result does not result in the establishment result, while the specific notification is not executed in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means based on the second result does not result in the establishment result, or the specific notification is set to be less likely to be executed than in the case based on the first result.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification is likely to be executed when the second result determination based on the first result determines that the winning is not successful. By doing so, it is possible to increase the occurrence rate of the specific notification without excessively increasing the winning probability of the success determination by the second success determination means. In addition, since the first result is more likely to win the success determination by the second success determination means than the second result, it is easy to associate the first result with the specific notification, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the specific notification at the time of the first result (reliability that the continuation condition is satisfied based on the current first result).

Feature C5. After executing a predetermined notification in the unit state, a response notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a battle effect by the display control device 81) that executes a corresponding notification that executes either content notification including advantageous content corresponding to the continuation condition being satisfied and unadvantageous content corresponding to the continuation condition not being satisfied in the unit state;
Means for restricting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means in a game corresponding to the execution of the corresponding notification by the corresponding notification means even when the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is a result of establishment corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition (a function of executing processing to prevent the specific effect from being performed during the battle effect by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the notification of the advantageous content or the non-advantageous content after the predetermined notification, the execution of the specific notification is restricted even if the continuation condition is satisfied as a result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in interest in the prepared response notification.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the response notification means includes means for changing the content notification in the response notification to the advantageous content when the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination unit after the start of the response notification is the establishment result (a function of executing, for example, the processing of steps S2014 and S2015 as processing for rewriting the battle by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of the specific notification is restricted when the continuation condition is established during the correspondence notification, the content notification in the correspondence notification is rewritten, so that the correspondence notification and the success or failure of the continuation condition can be prevented from being contradicted.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, further comprising means for permitting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a specific effect in a game in which a continuation command is received by the display control device 81) in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means corresponds to establishment of the continuation condition.

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification may be permitted in the game in which the establishment result corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition, the specific notification may be performed even in the game with the first result in a configuration in which the result of determination of establishment is more likely to be established in the case of the first result than in the case of the second result, and in which the specific notification is more likely to be performed in the case of the second result than in the case of the first result. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity in presentation that the specific notification is not executed even though the player has won the first result as a so-called rare combination.

It should be noted that the above configuration does not deny that the specific notification is not executed by the specific notification means (configuration of feature C2) in the game in which the result of establishment determination by the establishment determination means establishes the continuation condition, and the specific notification may be executed at least in the game in which the establishment result is established. However, it may be configured such that the specific notification is always executed in the game that results in establishment.

Feature C8. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, an execution determination means (function for executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the execution determination means performs the execution determination regardless of whether or not the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition in the current game.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied by the success determination by the success determination means, regardless of whether or not it is a game, execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of the lottery means in the current game. By doing so, it is possible to set the probability of occurrence of the specific notification separately from the winning probability in the determination of success, even though it is configured to determine success according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to expect the effect of the feature C1 by adjusting the occurrence rate.

Feature C9. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, an execution determination means (function for executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means;
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first result is obtained with a first probability, and performs the lottery so that the second result is obtained with a second probability that is higher than the first probability,
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so as to result in execution of the specific notification with a third probability in the case of the first result, and performs the execution determination so as to result in execution of the specific notification with a fourth probability lower than the third probability in the case of the second result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the product of the second probability and the fourth probability (5.5% if the continuation rate is 10%, 13.3% if the continuation rate is 90% (Fig. 51) is set to be greater than the product of the first probability and the third probability (0.8% if the continuation rate is 10%, 1.0% if the continuation rate is 90%).

According to the above configuration, there is a first result and a second result that is more likely to be won, and the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the first result is easier to win than the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the second result. and the winning probability (fourth probability) are set to be larger, the specific notification triggered by the second result is actually more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the first result. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the specific notification is not likely to be executed with the first result as a so-called rare combination as a trigger, but the winning of the first result is difficult and the specific notification is practically not given a chance. Therefore, it is possible to anticipate the performance of the specific notification even in the case of the second result in which the lottery result of the game is relatively easy to win, and it is possible to provide a configuration that favorably exhibits the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification.

The invention described in the features C1 to C9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are bet, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)."The problem to be solved by the invention is that ``In the above-described gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.'' is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be applied individually to each configuration of the features C1 to C9. It is also possible to apply all in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantage determination means (function for executing continuation determination processing and AT addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity;
when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, advantageous execution means for causing the advantageous event at a predetermined specific timing (processing for starting a new set of AT mode processing by main controller 101, for example, a function of executing steps S1404 to S1406);
Execution determination means (a function of executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of specific notification corresponding to the fact that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result and in a specific situation before the specific timing;
Specific notification means for executing the specific notification (function for executing specific effect setting processing by the display control device 81) based on the determination result by the execution determination means;
In the specific situation, after execution of a predetermined notification (for example, an ally attack effect or an enemy attack effect), a response notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a battle effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing either content notification including advantageous contents (ally victory effect) corresponding to the advantageous result or non-advantageous content (enemy victory effect) corresponding to the fact that the result of the advantage determination is not the advantageous result;
Limiting means for limiting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means in a situation where the corresponding notification is performed by the corresponding notification means (function for executing processing such as not to perform specific effect setting processing according to the value of the sub-side AT counter by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be granted. The game is diversified with the addition of sex.

In such playability, depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous event, the player's attention may be focused on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game and the awarding of the privilege based on the lottery result, and the gameability of the slot machine in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and the awarding of the privilege may be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until an advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for an advantageous event, and the player's interest may be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to execute the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result in a specific situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes the advantageous event becomes an advantageous result and before the advantageous event occurs. Further, in a specific situation, after the execution of the predetermined notification, the corresponding notification is executed in which the content notification including the advantageous content corresponding to the advantageous result and the non-advantageous content corresponding to the non-advantageous result of the advantage determination is executed, so that the player is interested in which content notification will be performed when the predetermined notification is performed, and it is possible to greatly enhance the performance in accordance with the progress of the game toward the specific timing when the advantageous event occurs.

On the other hand, in the corresponding notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the final content notification as described above, the content notification may be predicted to some extent by the notification content (predetermined notification mode) in the game before the game in which the content notification is performed.

On the other hand, there are also needs of players who expect a specific notification as advance notice of an advantageous event, and there is concern about loss of game opportunities due to a configuration in which the specific notification is not performed.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted only during the correspondence notification, the game in which the specific notification can be performed and the game in which the correspondence notification is performed without the specific notification are clearly distinguished from each other in the specific situation after the advantageous determination is performed until the occurrence of the advantageous event.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein a first specific game in which the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means and a second specific game, which is a game after the first specific game and in which the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means is restricted by the restriction means and the corresponding notification is performed by the corresponding notification means, are set as the games to be executed in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, the corresponding notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the content notification after the predetermined notification is performed in the second specific game in the specific situation, and the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result can be performed in the first specific game before the second specific game. In other words, after the execution of the advantageous judgment, after the game in which the specific information for deterministically informing the result of the advantageous judgment can be made, the game is set in which the corresponding information is executed in which the result of the advantageous judgment is notified by the content information after the predetermined information. By doing so, it is possible to expect the performance effect of both reports while avoiding duplication or contradiction in performance such as specific reporting after the corresponding reporting of the advantageous contents or no specific reporting despite the fact that the corresponding reporting of the advantageous contents is carried out.

Feature D3. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification by the corresponding notification means are set, and selection means for selecting the mode of the current predetermined notification from the plurality of modes set (a function of executing a process of selecting the current presentation table from the battle presentation table by the display control device 81),
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the selection means can select the mode of the predetermined notification regardless of whether or not the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the mode of the predetermined notification by the corresponding notification means, there is no need to grasp whether or not the specific notification is executed. Therefore, the processing configuration of the selection means becomes overwhelmingly simple, and since there is no need to store the predetermined notification of the pattern when the specific notification is executed, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

In addition, for example, in the case of a configuration premised on the specific notification, if a mode is prepared in which, when the specific notification occurs, a definite notification mode for notifying that the continuation condition is established at the time of content notification in the corresponding notification is selected, if the specific notification is missed, for example, even though such a mode is selected, the player may be notified that the specific notification has been overlooked in the definite notification mode after chasing. Then, from the viewpoint of preventing overlooking of the specific notification, circumstances may arise in which the specific notification must be set in a flashy presentation mode. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, by setting a performance mode that does not correspond to the specific report on the premise, it is possible to set the mode of the mode report in a mode that permits the overlooking of the specific report, and the specific report itself does not have to be so flashy. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the generation of the specific information cannot be grasped unless the player pays more attention to the performance, and the degree of attention to the game performance can be preferably increased by utilizing the player's psychology not to miss the specific information.

Feature D4. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification by the corresponding notification means are set, and selection means for selecting the mode of the current predetermined notification from the plurality of modes set (a function of executing a process of selecting the current presentation table from the battle presentation table by the display control device 81),
The selection means is configured to select the mode of the predetermined notification, which is a predetermined specific mode when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the selection means can select the mode of the predetermined notification to be the specific mode even when the specific notification by the specific notification means is not executed.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the mode of predetermined notification by the corresponding notification means, the predetermined notification mode, which is the specific mode, is selected if the specific notification is being executed. By doing so, the mode of the predetermined notification is set to one mode with the execution of the specific notification, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. Moreover, since the mode of the predetermined notification as the specific mode can be selected even when the specific notification is not executed, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity compared to the configuration in which the mode of the predetermined notification which is the specific mode is prepared exclusively for the case where the specific notification is executed, the need to make the specific notification flashy to prevent the specific notification from being overlooked does not arise, and the degree of attention to the specific notification can be increased.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein specific information (AT mode continuation rate, setting value) that can be beneficial to the player is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, if it is assumed that the specific information is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means, there is a possibility that the execution of the specific notification will prevent the player from knowing the specific information due to the execution of the specific notification in the configuration of feature D4 in which the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means is the unique mode (specific mode). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by making the player look forward to the specific information, but not knowing the specific information in exchange for it.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the specific information is suggested by a mode (occurrence rate) of the specific notification by the specific notification means.

By performing the above-described configuration, although the specific information is not suggested by the specified notification mode, the specific information is suggested by the specific notification mode, so that the player who wants to know the specific information pays more attention to the specific information. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the specific notification may not be executed by the specific notification means even when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and the content notification in the corresponding notification by the corresponding notification means is set so as not to be the non-advantageous content when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result.

According to the above configuration, if the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the corresponding information will always be advantageous, but the specific information may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to interpret the specific notification as an auxiliary notification of the corresponding notification, such as the fact that the content of the specific notification can sometimes be known by the specific notification, while basically the result of the advantageous determination is clearly notified by the corresponding notification. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of advantage in knowing whether or not the specific notification will be made by the specific notification, and it is possible to make the user look forward to the specific notification.

Feature D8. In the game executed in the specific situation, game notification means for performing game notification by predetermined notification means (function for executing processing for performing confrontation effect by display control device 81),
The specific notification means is configured to change a part of the game notification by the game notification means from a normal mode (for example, white character VS display) to a specific mode (for example, red character VS display) as the specific notification,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the game notification means can execute the game notification in the normal mode when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and can execute the game notification in the normal mode when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is different from the advantageous result.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by changing part of the game notification performed in each game from the normal mode to the specific mode. In this case, the game notification in the normal mode is executed both when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result and when it is not an advantageous result. In other words, even if the specific notification is not performed, it does not indicate that it is not an advantageous result, and since the specific notification only changes a part of the game notification to the specific mode, the possibility of overlooking it increases. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game performance by utilizing the player's psychology that he does not want to miss the specific notification.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the execution determination means is configured to determine execution of the specific notification based on a lottery result of the lottery means in the game executed in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, execution of the specific notification is determined based on the lottery result of each game in the specific situation. By doing so, the specific notification and the lottery result of each game are closely associated, for example, an advantageous judgment is made according to the lottery result in the game in which the specific notification is generated, and it is possible to give an impression that the advantageous result is an advantageous result.

Feature D10. The predetermined notification is configured to be executed over a plurality of games,
Notification mode information storage means (various table storage area 182a by display control device 81) for storing a notification mode information group (battle effect table) in which a plurality of types of notification modes of the predetermined notification over the plurality of games are set;
a notification mode selection means (a function of executing a process of selecting a current battle effect table by the display control device 81) for selecting a notification mode of a predetermined notification in the current corresponding notification from the notification mode information group stored in the notification mode information storage means based on the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means;
with
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the correspondence notification means executes the predetermined notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification is executed over a plurality of games, and the predetermined notification is performed in the notification mode selected from the notification mode information group based on the result of the advantageous determination. Here, in the configuration in which the predetermined notification is performed over a plurality of games, if the configuration is such that the specific notification may be performed in the game in which the predetermined notification is performed, it becomes necessary to determine the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game. In this regard, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game in which the corresponding notification is executed as described above, it is not necessary to set the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game, and it is possible to perform the corresponding notification with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D11. A first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) are set with different probabilities that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means will be the advantageous result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein the execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the probability of execution of the specific notification differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the specific information differs according to the winning probability of the advantageous determination, and a game is added such as predicting the winning probability of the advantageous determination through the occurrence rate of the specific information. By doing so, it is possible not only to grasp the result of the advantageous determination by performing the specific notification, but also to predict the winning probability of the advantageous determination, so that the degree of attention to the specific notification can be favorably increased.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707.). It is.

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be applied individually to each configuration of the features D1 to D11, and part of each technical idea can be applied. Or it is also possible to combine and apply all. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is transitioned after the unit state is executed, and when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) less than the specific number is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when the condition for continuing notification of the unit notification state is satisfied, the next unit notification state is started after the end of the unit notification state. On the other hand, when the continuation condition for notification is not satisfied, the notification control means (to perform a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state. function to execute the processing of
When the notification continuation condition is satisfied in the unit notification state, a specific notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a third specific effect or a fourth specific effect in the pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) for executing a predetermined specific notification (specific effect) in the unit notification state;
When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means in one unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state, and the next unit notification state can be started.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be granted. In this case, an advantageous state for the player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied. In addition, in the advantageous state, a special number of games smaller than the specific number of continuous games in the unit state is set as one unit notification state, and if the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, the next unit notification state is started after the unit notification state ends, and if the condition for continuing the notification of the unit notification state is not satisfied, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. It is possible to make it appear as if the continuation condition is likely to be established by increasing the number of repetitions of the unit notification state without making the continuation condition of the unit state in the advantageous state to be established too easily to increase the degree of advantage too much.

However, in such a configuration that repeats the unit notification state whose number of games is smaller than the number of games of the unit state, it may be difficult to match the game in which the unit state ends with the game in which the unit notification state ends. More specifically, if the specific number, which is the number of games in the unit state, and the special number, which is the number of games in the unit notification state, are not a common divisor, the game in which the unit state ends does not match the game in which the unit notification state ends, and there is a possibility that the presentation effect by the unit notification state cannot be favorably expected.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the notification continuation condition is satisfied in the unit notification state, the specific notification is executed, and regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state, the specific notification is used as a trigger to terminate the unit notification state and start the next unit notification state. This makes it easy to match the number of games in the unit notification state with the number of games in the unit state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably expect the production effect by repeating the unit notification state with the number of games smaller than the unit state.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising means for restricting the end of the unit state when the condition for continuation is established in the unit state and the number of games remaining in the unit state remains (function for executing processing to prevent the AT mode set from being updated before the AT game counter reaches 0 by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state side terminates the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state with the specific notification as a trigger regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state, while the unit state side is restricted from terminating the unit state and starting the next unit state in a situation where the number of games remaining in the unit state exists even if the continuation condition is satisfied. In this way, by adjusting only the number of games on the unit notification state side to match the number of games in both states, it is possible to match the number of games in both states with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the specific notification means includes first means for executing the specific notification according to the number of games remaining in the unit state (function for executing processing for generating a specific effect when updating a set for which a continuation command has not been received by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, since the unit notification state is updated by generating the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state side, it is possible to adjust the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state (special number) without discomfort.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the first means executes the specific notification in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is greater than the special number.

According to the above configuration, the special number of games in the next unit notification state can be completed before the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed even if the specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state and the next unit notification state is started. Therefore, for example, the event that the unit state ends in the middle of the unit notification state does not occur, and the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state can be adjusted without discomfort.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or feature E4, wherein the first means executes the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied.

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed, there are games equal to or greater than the specified number in the next unit state. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the opportunity to perform the specific notification according to the remaining number of games is limited to the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the execution frequency of the processing for performing the specific notification according to the remaining number of games can be reduced, and the processing can be simplified.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the specific notification means includes a second means for executing the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established (a function of executing processing for performing these specific effects based on a third specific effect lottery or a fourth specific effect lottery by the display control device 81).

In a unit state in which a continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is played, there are games of a specific number or more in the next unit state, and a special number of games in the next unit state can be finished no matter when the specific notification is executed at any timing. Therefore, in the above configuration, by executing the specific notification regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state where the continuation condition is established, it is possible to generate randomness in the execution timing of the specific notification, making it difficult to know when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it is possible to diversify the performance.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the second means includes execution determination means (a function of executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines execution of the specific notification according to the lottery result of the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, and executes the specific notification based on the determination result of the execution determination means.

According to the above configuration, in a unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game, so it is possible to give the player an impression as if the continuation condition is satisfied by the lottery result of each game. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein the specific notification means includes a third means for executing the specific notification when the number of games in the unit notification state reaches the special number in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established (a function of executing a process for performing a third specific effect or a fourth specific effect in the final game of the pseudo set by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, in the unit state where the continuation condition is established, the specific notification is executed in the final game of the unit notification state, thereby eliminating the inconvenience that the unit notification state ends without the specific notification being performed. In this case, the number of games for completing the next unit notification state after the specific notification exists regardless of the number of the game in the unit state in which the final game in the unit notification state in which the specific notification is performed is present, so that the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state can be adjusted without difficulty.

Feature E9. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the special number of games is executed in the unit notification state without performing the specific notification, and after the end of the unit notification state, end notification means (a function of executing a process for performing an ending effect by the display control device 81) that executes a predetermined end notification in the game until the end game in which the advantageous state ends.

According to the above configuration, even if the game in which the unit state ends does not completely match the game in which the unit notification state ends, it is possible to make up for the difference with the predetermined end notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to reasonably adjust the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state.

Feature E10. The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the end notification means can execute the predetermined end notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined number of games for end notification can be either the first number or the second number, and the number of games from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the unit state does not need to be a uniform number of games. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the number of games in the unit notification state matches the number of games in the unit state with a relatively simple configuration.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the number of games played from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is a first number, the end notification means performs the predetermined end notification over the first number of games, and when the number of games from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is a second number different from the first number, the predetermined end notification is performed over the second number of games. The gaming machine according to feature E9." .

Feature E11. A plurality of setting values are set that can cause changes in the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and setting means for setting one of the plurality of set values (a function of executing a winning probability setting process by the main controller 101);
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the specific notification means executes the specific notification in the unit notification state before the ending unit notification state so that the special number of games is digested without performing the specific notification in the unit notification state, and the number of finished games until the end game in which the advantageous state ends after the unit notification state ends is likely to become the first number, and the setting value set by the setting means is different from the first setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, further comprising fourth means (function for executing processing for performing a third specific effect based on the result of lottery processing for the number of ending games by the display control device 81, FIG. 79) capable of executing the specific notification in the unit notification state before the ending unit notification state so that the ending game number is likely to become a second number different from the first number when the second set values are different.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the number of games in the unit notification state and the end game in the unit state (the number of finished games) is likely to differ depending on the set value, and the set value can be predicted from the number of games in the difference.

Feature E12. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition of the unit state is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state are set,
The fourth means is
In the first advantage state, if the configuration value set according to the configuration means is the first configuration value, the specified reporting is executed in the unit alarm state before the terminated unit alarm state so that the number of ending games is the first number, and the configuration values set by the setting means are the 2nd configuration values. Is the specific alarm in the unit reward state before the end of the unit alarm state so that the number of terminal games is likely to be the second number.
In the second advantageous state, when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the ending unit notification state so that the number of games to be finished is the second number, and when the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the ending unit notification state so that the number of games to be finished is the first number. The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the set value indicated by the number of games (the number of finished games) of the difference between the unit notification state and the end game of the unit state differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different continuation conditions. In other words, in order to narrow down the setting values, it is not enough to simply grasp the number of games of the difference, and it is necessary to grasp which advantageous state is in advance. By doing so, it is possible to preferably improve the playability in an advantageous state.

Feature E13. The specific notification means includes a second means for executing the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied (a function of executing processing for performing these specific effects based on a third specific effect lottery or a fourth specific effect lottery by the display control device 81),
The second means includes execution determination means (a function of executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines execution of the specific notification according to the lottery result of the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to feature E12, wherein the execution determination means determines the execution of the specific notification so that the probability of execution of the specific notification differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

In a unit state in which a continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is played, there are games of a specific number or more in the next unit state, and a special number of games in the next unit state can be finished no matter when the specific notification is executed at any timing. Therefore, in the above configuration, by executing the specific notification regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state where the continuation condition is established, it is possible to generate randomness in the execution timing of the specific notification, making it difficult to know when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it is possible to diversify the performance.

Moreover, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game, so that the player can be given an impression as if the continuation condition is satisfied by the lottery result of each game. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game.

In addition, since the determination of the execution of the specific information is performed so that the probability of winning is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the player can predict in which advantageous state the player stays from the occurrence rate of the specific information. Thus, in the middle of the advantageous state, the kind of the advantageous state is grasped from the occurrence rate of the specific information in the unit information state, and when the unit information state ends, the set value is predicted from the number of games of the difference until the end of the advantageous state and the kind of the predicted advantageous state.

The invention described in the features E1 to E13 is known as "a type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707.). It is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be individually applied to each configuration of the features E1 to E13, and part of each technical idea can be applied. Or it is also possible to combine and apply all. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. On the other hand, if the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the notification control means (pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) that does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state. function to execute processing to perform) and
A first means for performing the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number (a function of executing a process of updating the pseudo set in the start game of the set in which the continuation command by the display control device 81 has not been received);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine game machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is terminated and a privilege according to the lottery result can be awarded. In an advantageous state for the player, the special number game is set to one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started, and specified in the unit notification state. When a special number of games are executed without any notification, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished, so that the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and the player can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

However, in the structure for informing the continuation of such an advantageous state by repeating the unit informing state, if the advantageous state ends despite the existence of the number of remaining games in the unit informing state, the original premise collapses and the reliability of the informing by the unit informing state is greatly lowered.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is larger than the special number, the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, and in the new unit notification state, all the special number games can be completed, and the advantageous state can be ended in a situation where there is no remaining game number in the unit notification state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably expect the production effect by the notification of the unit notification state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature F2. In a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number, an execution determination means (function for executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) is provided to determine execution of the specific notification in the unit notification state, and when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to executing the specific notification, a second means (specification based on the lottery result of each specific effect lottery by the display control device 81) to perform the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it has a functional function of executing processing for performing production.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, the specific notification is uniformly generated and the unit notification state is updated, while before reaching the special number, the specific notification is generated and the unit notification state is updated based on the execution determination of each game. By doing so, it becomes difficult to know when the specific notification will occur in each game in the unit notification state, and it is possible to suitably realize the game property that makes it possible to grasp the continuation of the advantageous state by repeating the unit notification state.

Feature F3. When a predetermined opportunity (AT set update) occurs in the advantageous state, after executing a predetermined number of games larger than the special number, an end determination means (a function of executing a continuation determination process by the main control device 101) for determining the end of the advantageous state is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the first means performs the specific notification in the unit notification state when the end determination result by the end determination means is an end result (non-continuation) corresponding to ending the advantageous state after executing the predetermined number of games.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means is configured to perform end determination to end the advantageous state after a predetermined number of games, and when the result of the end determination is the end result, the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated. With such a configuration, the first means in the specific notification means can perform the specific notification based on the determination result of the end determination means, and the processing configuration can be simplified such that the first means does not always need to know the number of remaining games in an advantageous state.

Feature F4. a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the end determination means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the notification control means and provided separately from the first control device;
The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by comprising:

As in the above configuration, if the end determination means and the specific notification means (especially the first means) are provided in separate control devices, the effect of the feature F3 can be more preferably achieved by decentralizing the functions.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or feature F4, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs each time the predetermined number of games are executed.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means does not perform end determination for each game, but performs end determination for each predetermined number of games. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the frequency of end determination, and to suppress the processing load.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the notification control means comprises a third means (a function of executing a process for performing a specific effect when the AT set is updated by the display control device 81) for performing the specific notification in the unit notification state when the end determination result by the end determination means is a result (continuation) different from the end result.

According to the above configuration, since the third means may perform the specific notification even if the result of the end determination is not the end result, the specific notification by the third means can effectively camouflage the specific notification by the first means, and the specific notification is less likely to be a sign that the game will end after a predetermined number of remaining games. In this way, even if the specific notification is made, it is possible to expect that the advantageous state will continue.

Feature F7. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, further comprising special notification means capable of executing a predetermined special notification (a function of executing a process for performing an ending effect or a jackpot effect by the display control device 81) over the number of games played, which is the difference between the predetermined number and the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed by the first means, the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number, and among them, the special number games are performed by the unit notification state after being updated by the specific notification, and the special notification is performed over the number of games that is the difference between the predetermined number and the special number. By doing so, even if the predetermined number and the special number do not completely match, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a blank period in the performance.

Feature F8. Characteristic feature F7, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification after the unit notification state following the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means is completed.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed after the next unit notification state updated by the specific notification, and the advantageous state ends when the special notification ends. In other words, the special notification becomes an effect indicating the end of the advantageous state, and after the end of the effect by the unit notification state, the game is supplemented by a so-called ending effect until the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the performance during the period in which the performance by the unit notification state is not performed without discomfort.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized in that the special notification means executes the special notification indicating that the advantageous state ends after the unit notification state following the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means ends."

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification in a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the unit notification state next to the unit notification state.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed in the game between the unit notification state updated by the specific notification and the next unit notification state, and the advantageous state ends when the next unit notification state ends. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the advantageous state will end if the specific notification is not performed during the unit notification state, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. In this case, the special notification is equivalent to a jackpot performance indicating that the specific notification occurs in the unit notification state and shifts to the next unit notification state, and the performance during the period in which the performance in the unit notification state is not performed can be enjoyed without discomfort.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification indicating that the unit notification state is updated in a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the unit notification state next to the unit notification state."

In addition, the above-mentioned "special notification" is not limited to the game between the unit notification state terminated by the specific notification by the first means and the next unit notification state. By configuring the special notification to be performed also in the game between the unit notification state terminated by the specific notification by other means and the next unit notification state, it is possible to have a strong impression that the special notification is a notification indicating that the unit notification state can be updated.

Feature F10. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the predetermined number is a number that is less than or equal to twice the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, the specific notification is performed to terminate the unit notification state, and then the unit notification state is started from the next game. When the unit notification state is completed over the special number of games, the number of remaining games in the advantageous state becomes smaller than the special number. That is, at the time when the unit notification state over the special number of games cannot be digested for two times, but can be digested for at least one, the specific notification by the first means is performed. Therefore, it is only necessary to terminate the performance by the unit notification state after performing without updating the unit notification state for one time (without generating the specific notification), and it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the advantageous state is terminated during the unit notification state.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the predetermined number is one more than the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, the specific notification is performed to terminate the unit notification state, and then, if the unit notification state is started from the next game, the number of remaining games in the advantageous state becomes 0 just when the unit notification state is completed over the special number of games. By doing so, it is possible to match the end game of the advantageous state with the end game of the effect due to the unit notification state.

In addition, the invention described in the features F1 to F11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707.). It is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G8, the features H1 to H9, the features I1 to I6, and the features J1 to J10 can be applied individually to each configuration of the features F1 to F11. Or it is also possible to combine and apply all. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) that tends to increase the number of games than the first advantageous state are set.
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. On the other hand, if the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the notification control means (pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) that does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state. function to execute processing to perform),
The game machine is characterized in that, when the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is set to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine game machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is terminated and a privilege according to the lottery result can be awarded. In an advantageous state for the player, the special number game is set to one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started, and specified in the unit notification state. When a special number of games are executed without any notification, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished, so that the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and the player can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set, and the unit notification state in the second advantageous state is set so that the average number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state when specific notification is performed in the unit notification state is larger than the unit notification state in the first advantageous state.

In this case, since the number of staying games in the unit notification state increases in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, if the same number of games continues in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the number of repetitions of the unit informing state tends to be larger in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state can be made to appear smaller than the difference in the number of continued games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. In this way, it is possible to make the difference in the number of games in the advantageous state appear larger by the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, thereby making it possible to improve interest.

Feature G2. The notification control means includes an execution determination means (function for executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines execution of the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state, and is configured to perform the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to executing the specific notification.
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determining means is the corresponding result is set higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, so that when the specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is greater in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of the feature G1 simply by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature G3. The execution determination means is configured to perform the execution determination according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state becomes the corresponding result is higher than the probability that the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state becomes the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, execution determination is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give an impression that whether or not the specific notification is executed depends on one's own luck, so that the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is preferably increased.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the specific notification higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game becomes the specific result. As a result, the average number of executed games in the unit notification state can be made larger in the second advantageous state, and the excellent game performance of the feature G1 can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

In the above configuration, the average number of executed games in the unit notification state tends to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and in the configuration in which the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state can be increased relative to the number of games to be continued, the actual average number of repetitions in the unit notification state is set to be greater in the second advantageous state, and the difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is not such a difference that the number of repetitions is reversed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the impression of a so-called successful race due to an excessively large difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

In the above configuration, the average number of executed games in the unit notification state tends to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state can be increased relative to the number of continuous games. In the configuration, the average number of repetitions of the actual unit notification state is also set to be greater in the first advantageous state, and the difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is such a difference that the number of repetitions is reversed. In this way, by providing a difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state, it is possible to maximize the performance effect that makes even the first advantageous state with a small number of continuous games more advantageous than the second advantageous state.

When the above configuration is applied to feature G5, the number of types of advantageous states should be increased, and the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature G5 should be different from the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature G6.

Specifically, for example, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and a third advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) are provided in order of the lowest average number of continuous games, and the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is made to be the lowest in the first advantageous state and the highest in the third advantageous state. In addition, the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is larger than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature G5), and the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the second advantageous state is set to be greater than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature G6).

Feature G7. In the advantageous state, a predetermined number of games (18 games) or more are played as one unit state, and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is entered after the unit state is executed, and when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, so that the number of games is more likely to be increased in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, in the advantageous state of the set management type such that if the continuation condition is satisfied with a specific number of games as one unit state, the transition to the next unit state is performed, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the transition to the next unit state is not performed. In such a set management type advantageous state, the difference in the degree of advantage due to the difference in the number of sets is of course greater than the difference in the number of games played, so that the impression of advantage/disadvantage between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which there is a difference in the establishment probability of the continuation condition is greatly different. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature G1 to the set management type advantageous state such as the above configuration, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state can be made larger or smaller than the difference in the number of repetitions of the actual unit state (the difference in the number of sets), and such an effect can be expected more preferably.

Feature G8. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) that tends to increase the number of games than the first advantageous state are set.
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. On the other hand, if the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the notification control means (pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) that does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state. function to execute processing to perform),
The game machine is characterized in that, when the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is set differently between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine game machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is terminated and a privilege according to the lottery result can be awarded. In an advantageous state for the player, the special number game is set to one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started, and specified in the unit notification state. When a special number of games are executed without any notification, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished, so that the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and the player can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set, and the unit notification state in the first advantageous state and the unit notification state in the second advantageous state are set so that the average number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state when specific notification is performed in the unit notification state is set to be different.

In this case, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state tends to increase in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state if the same number of games continues in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state can be made to appear smaller than the difference in the number of continued games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. Further, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state tends to be smaller in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, if the same number of games continues in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the number of repetitions of the unit informing state tends to be greater in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state appear larger than the difference in the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state.

Thus, according to the above configuration, the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state can be made to appear larger or smaller depending on the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, making it possible to improve interest.

The invention described in the above features G1 to G8 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)."The problem to be solved by the invention is that ``In the above-described gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.'' is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be applied individually to each configuration of the features G1 to G8, or a part of each technical idea or It is also possible to apply all in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, a predetermined specific number of games (18 games) are played as one unit state, and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is entered after the unit state is executed, and when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the advantageous state, a first notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first notification (pseudo set effect) over a plurality of games;
In the advantageous state, a second notification means (for example, an opening effect, an ending effect, or a jackpot effect) can be executed over a plurality of games so as to be continuous before or after the first notification (a function of executing processing for performing an opening effect, an ending effect, or a big win effect by the display control device 81);
with
The game machine is characterized in that the number of games for which the first notification is performed by the first notification means and the number of games for which the second notification is performed by the second notification means are set so as to be equal to or larger than the specific number and to be less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be granted. In this case, an advantageous state for the player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied.

In such a configuration, the first notification and the second notification are performed during the unit state, and when the number of games of the first notification and the second notification are combined, there are cases where the number of games in the unit state is equal to or larger than a specific number, and that there are cases where the number is smaller than the specific number. In this way, even if the number of games in the unit state is not changed from a specific number, it is possible to make it appear as if the number of games in the unit state is getting longer or shorter on the performance side, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the advantageous state of the set management type without using complicated processing.

Feature H2. The first notification means executes the first notification with the number of games played less than the specific number,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification when the number of games played is less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of games will not exceed a specific number with only one notification, and it is possible to give the impression that the set of both notifications corresponds to one unit state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the effect of making the length of the unit state change by both notifications.

Feature H3. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number,
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the second notification means can execute the second notification over a third number of games, and can be executed over a fourth number of games different from the third number.

According to the above configuration, the number of games for both the first notification and the second notification can be changed. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which the second notification is performed following the first notification and one set of performance is performed, even if the first notification is shortened, it is possible to make the user expect that the second notification will continue for a long time.

Note that the above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and that the "second number" and the "fourth number" are the same number.

Also, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for executing the first notification,
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the second notification means can change the number of games for which the second notification is performed.

Feature H4. The first notification means executes the first notification with the game of the special number (10) as the upper limit,
The game according to feature H3, characterized in that when a predetermined specific notification is executed during execution of the first notification by the first notification means, the first notification is terminated regardless of the number of games remaining in the first notification, and the second notification is started by the second notification means, and the advantageous state is terminated after the first notification is completed if the specific notification is not performed over the special number of games. technique.

According to the above configuration, the first notification is performed over the special number of games, and if the specific notification is performed during the first notification, the second notification is performed, but if the specific notification is not performed during the first notification, the advantageous state ends. As a result, it is possible to realize thrilling playability by utilizing the desire of the player for conflicting events such as the desire to secure a large number of games in the first notification by performing the specific notification at the earliest possible timing and the desire to confirm that the specific notification is performed at the earliest possible timing to ensure that the advantageous state does not end.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to feature H4, further comprising: means for ending the second notification by the second notification means in a game in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is equal to the special number plus 1, and starting the first notification by the first notification means from the next game (a function of executing processing for ending the jackpot effect in the eighth game of the final AT set by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the gaming machine having the feature H4, in which the advantageous state ends when the first notification is executed without the specific notification being performed over the special number of games.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H4 or feature H5, further comprising: means for continuing the second notification that has been performed until the number of remaining games in the unit state becomes a number obtained by adding 1 to the special number in a game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is started before the unit state is started. .

According to the above configuration, when the continuation condition is not satisfied and the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the last unit state is reached, and if the second notification is performed in the game before the update of the unit state, the second notification is continued until the number of remaining games of the unit state becomes the special number +1. By doing so, the second notification is made in the last unit state, and then the first notification is made over the special number of games, ending the advantageous state. Such a configuration can be realized because the number of games of the second notification can be changed, and by doing so, it is possible to make the impression that the unit state is lengthened or shortened by both notifications as in the feature H1, and at the same time, it is possible to match the end of the unit state and the end of both notifications.

Feature H7. In the game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not established, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, and when the number of continuous games of the second notification that has been executed becomes larger than the upper limit of the number of continuous games of the second notification until the number of remaining games in the unit state is the special number plus 1, the second notification is terminated and the second notification is performed by the first notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H6, further comprising means for starting the first notification (function for executing the processing of steps S3909 to S3917 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the continuation condition is not satisfied and the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the last unit state is reached, when the second notification is performed in the game before the unit state is updated, and when the second notification is continued until the number of remaining games in the unit state becomes the special number + 1, the upper limit number of games of the second notification is reached, the second notification is terminated and the first notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the last unit state is reached from being realized through the fact that the length of the second notification is longer than usual.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to feature H7, further comprising: means for performing the first notification by the first notification means and the second notification by the second notification means (a function of executing steps S3617 to S3620, steps S3715 to S3718, etc. by the display control device 81) until the number of remaining games in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the second notification is terminated and the first notification is started when the last unit state is updated, the first notification and the second notification are performed before the number of remaining games in the last unit state reaches the special number +1. Then, the first notification is made again in the remaining special number of games, and the advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to well match the end of the unit state with the end of both reports while making it possible to give the impression that the unit state is lengthened or shortened by both reports as in the feature H1.

Feature H9. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification over a third number of games.

According to the above configuration, the number of games for the first notification can change, while the number of games for the second notification does not change. By doing so, the effect of the feature H1 can be expected only by adjusting the number of games on the first notification side, and the configuration can be simplified.

The above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and that the "second number" and the "third number" are the same number.

When the above configuration is applied to the features H3 to H8, for example, "the second notification means includes a specific second notification means and a predetermined second notification means, the specific second notification means can execute the second notification over a third number of games, and can be executed over a second number of games different from the fourth number, and the predetermined second notification means executes the second notification over a third number of games." do it.

Also, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for executing the first notification,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein said second notification means cannot change the number of games for which said second notification is performed.

The invention described in the above features H1 to H9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are bet, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)."The problem to be solved by the invention is that it is necessary to improve the interest in the game in the above-described gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect." is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be applied individually to each configuration of the features H1 to H9, or a part of each technical idea or It is also possible to apply all in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) that tends to increase the number of games than the first advantageous state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is transitioned after the unit state is executed, and when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. On the other hand, if the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the notification control means (pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) that does not start the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state. function to execute processing to perform),
The game machine is characterized in that the number of times of the unit notification state (the number of pseudo sets) executed in the unit state is set so that the second advantageous state tends to be smaller than the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be awarded. In a state advantageous to the player, a unit state is set for a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied.

In such a configuration, a special number of games is set as one unit notification state during an advantageous state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started, and when a special number of games are executed without performing a specific notification in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is prevented from starting after the unit notification state is finished. , the specific notification can be expected in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set, but the unit notification state in the first advantageous state and the unit notification state in the second advantageous state are set so that the number of unit notification states executed in the unit state is likely to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

In this case, if the unit states are repeatedly executed the same number of times in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be larger in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state continues substantially longer than the first advantageous state and the number of repetitions of the unit state increases, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state can be made to appear smaller than the difference in the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state.

By doing so, it is possible to make the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state appear larger by the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, thereby making it possible to improve interest.

Feature I2. The notification control means includes an execution determination means (function for executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) that determines execution of the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state, and is configured to perform the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to executing the specific notification.
The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the corresponding result is set to be higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, so that the number of times of the unit notification states executed in the unit state (the number of pseudo sets) tends to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, an excellent effect of feature I1 can be expected simply by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature I3. The execution determination means is configured to perform the execution determination according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state becomes the corresponding result is higher than the probability that the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state becomes the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, execution determination is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give an impression that whether or not the specific notification is executed depends on one's own luck, so that the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is preferably increased.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the specific notification higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game becomes the specific result. Therefore, as a result, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the unit state can be increased in the first advantageous state, and it is possible to realize the excellent playability of the feature I1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the total number of unit notification states in the advantageous state is set to be greater in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state in which a specific number of games are played as a unit in the advantageous state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of unit notification states in the first advantageous state can be increased relative to the number of games to be continued. The difference is not enough to reverse the number of times. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the impression that the difference in the number of times of the unit notification state is too large and that it is a so-called successful race.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the total number of unit notification states in the advantageous state is set to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state in which a specific number of games are played as a unit in the advantageous state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and in a configuration in which the number of unit notification states in the first advantageous state can be increased relative to the number of games to be continued, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the entire actual advantageous state is also set to be greater in the first advantageous state, and the difference in the number of unit notification states in the unit state is the total number of unit notification states in the advantageous state. The difference is enough to reverse the number of times. By doing so, even in the first advantageous state with a small number of continuous games, it is possible to maximize the production effect that makes it look more advantageous than the second advantageous state.

When the above configuration is applied to feature I5, the number of types of advantageous states should be increased, and the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature I5 should be different from the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature I6.

Specifically, for example, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and a third advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) are provided in descending order of the average number of continuous games, and the number of unit notification states in the unit state is made most likely to be the first advantageous state and the third advantageous state to be the least likely. In addition, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is set to be greater than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature I5), and the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the second advantageous state is set to be greater than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature I6).

The invention described in the above features I1 to I6 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are bet, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)."The problem to be solved by the invention is that ``In the above-described gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.'' is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be applied individually to each configuration of the above features I1 to I6, or a part of each technical idea or It is also possible to apply all in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. a game progressing means (a function of executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) that tends to increase the number of games than the first advantageous state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set), and when the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied, the next unit state is transitioned after the unit state is executed, and when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed.
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and if the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, the transition to the next unit notification state is performed, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, notification control means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) that does not move to the next unit notification state is provided.
The game machine is characterized in that the notification control means is capable of executing the unit notification state across the unit states.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game ends and a privilege according to the lottery result can be awarded. In a state advantageous to the player, a unit state is set for a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as the continuation condition is satisfied.

In such a configuration, a set management type notification with a special number of games as one unit notification state during the advantageous state is also performed, and the unit notification state can be executed so as to straddle the unit state and the unit state in the advantageous state. By doing so, it is allowed that the repetition of the unit state and the repetition of the unit notification state are not synchronized, and the success or failure of the continuation condition of the unit notification state can be relatively freely set without being greatly affected by the success or failure of the continuation condition of the unit state. Therefore, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of repetitions of the unit notification state relative to the actual number of repetitions of the unit state, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific number is a number different from an integral multiple of the special number, and the special number is a number different from an integral multiple of the specific number.

As in the above configuration, by preventing the relationship between the number of games, which is the repeating unit of the unit state, and the number of games, which is the repeating unit of the unit notification state, from being an integer multiple, it becomes difficult to synchronize the unit state and the unit notification state. Therefore, it becomes easier to execute the unit notification state across the unit states, and the effect of the characteristic J1 can be exhibited more clearly.

Feature J3. The notification control means terminates the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state when a predetermined specific notification has been performed in the unit notification state, assuming that the continuation condition of the unit notification state is met. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is terminated, as the continuation condition of the unit notification state is not satisfied. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state may be updated by the specific notification without executing the special number of games, and the number of games in the unit notification state can change with the special number as the maximum number. By doing so, it is possible to relatively freely manage whether or not the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state whether or not the update of the unit state and the update of the unit notification state are synchronized when executing the unit notification state across the unit states, and the unit notification state and the unit notification state.

Feature J4. In the unit state where the continuation condition is satisfied, regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state, a first execution determination means (a function of executing a third specific effect lottery process etc. by the display control device 81) for executing the execution of the specific notification.
The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of execution determination by the first execution determination means corresponds to execution of the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, execution determination of the specific notification is performed regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state. By doing so, the degree of freedom of the game in which the specific notification is executed is greatly improved, and the scene where the unit notification state is executed across the unit states increases. Therefore, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of the characteristic J1 more suitably.

Feature J5. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, according to the number of remaining games in the unit state, second execution determination means for determining whether to execute the specific notification (function for executing the third specific effect etc. in the first game of the AT set in which the sub-side continuation flag by the display control device 81 is not set);
The gaming machine according to feature J3 or feature J4, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the second execution determination means corresponds to executing the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, in a unit state in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, execution of the specific notification is determined according to the number of remaining games in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that the unit notification state continues even though the unit state is terminated and the advantageous state is also terminated, and the reliability of the unit notification state can be ensured.

Feature J6. The gaming machine according to feature J5, wherein the second execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the specific notification is performed in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is equal to or greater than the special number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of the feature J5.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the notification control means terminates the unit notification state when a condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, executes special notification over a predetermined second special number of games, and starts the next unit notification state after execution of the special notification.

According to the above configuration, the game in which the special notification is performed is interposed between the unit notification state and the unit notification state. As the special notification, for example, a jackpot performance may be conceived that congratulates the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the unit notification state. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect when the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, and even if the specific number that is the number of continuous games in the unit state and the special number that is the number of continuous games in the unit notification state are the same, or even if the update of the unit state and the unit notification state happens to be synchronized, the game in which the special notification is performed causes a deviation in the update, and the scene where the unit notification state is executed so as to straddle the unit state and the unit state is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of the characteristic J1 while enhancing the effect of the presentation when the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied.

Feature J8. The gaming machine according to feature J7, wherein the special notification can be executed across the unit state and the unit state.

According to the above configuration, there is a case where the special notification as the jackpot effect is also executed across the unit states. By doing so, it becomes possible to update the unit notification state regardless of the game in which the unit state is updated, and it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in performing the performance by the unit notification state.

Feature J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the special number is smaller than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is likely to be larger than the number of repetitions of the unit state, and by utilizing the fact that the unit notification state is frequently updated, it is possible to give an impression that the advantageous state continues longer than the number of games in which the actual advantageous state continues. In addition, by doing so, one unit notification state does not straddle a plurality of unit states when the unit notification state straddles the unit states. Therefore, the update of the unit notification state is performed during at least one unit state, and even though the condition for continuing the unit state is not established and the advantageous state ends, the event that the unit notification state has not completed the special number of games can be made difficult to occur.

Feature J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, characterized in that, in one of the advantageous states, the continuation condition of the unit notification state is more likely to be satisfied than the continuation condition of the unit state.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is greater than the number of repetitions of the unit state. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the game continues longer than the actual number of games in which the advantageous state continues.

In addition, the invention described in the above features J1 to J10 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, the internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating. When the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped.And when the result of stopping the reel corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707.). It is.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 can be individually applied to each configuration of the features J1 to J10, and a part of each technical idea can be applied. Or it is also possible to combine and apply all. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

To each configuration of the feature group A to feature group H detailed above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group H individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine comprising an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part arranged in the game area, and giving a privilege to the player when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of each game part.

Spindle type game machine such as a slot machine: A game machine which is equipped with a variable display means for displaying a series of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and generating a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player under the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started due to the operation of the operation means for starting, the variation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the final stop symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. .

A belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol row, the symbol variation is started due to the operation of the start operation means, the symbol variation is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated under the necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of stop is a specific symbol, and further, a ball tray. and a putting-out device for putting out the game balls to the ball receiving tray, so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game balls are thrown in by the putting-in device.

10... Slot machine as game machine 32... Reel as revolving body 41... Start lever as start operation means 42 to 44... Stop switch as stop operation means 64... Speaker constituting auxiliary effect section 65... Auxiliary display part constituting auxiliary effect part 68... Instruction monitor N8... Eighth display segment as section indicator 81... Display control device as sub control board 101... Main control device as main control board 102... Lottery means and a CPU that constitutes various control means such as main control means.

Claims (1)

a game progress means for progressing a game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by a player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
privilege granting means for awarding a privilege to a player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
As the advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of games tends to be larger than the first advantageous state are set,
In the advantageous state, a special number game is set as one unit notification state, and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. On the other hand, if the special number game is executed without the specific notification being performed, after the end of the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started.
The game machine is characterized in that, when the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is set to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

Images